Tips Category RSS Feed | GameSkinny.com Tips RSS Feed on GameSkinny.com https://www.gameskinny.com/ en Launch Media Network Minecraft Dungeons: How to Invite Friends https://www.gameskinny.com/fervv/minecraft-dungeons-how-to-invite-friends https://www.gameskinny.com/fervv/minecraft-dungeons-how-to-invite-friends Thu, 28 May 2020 10:59:35 -0400 Sergey_3847

Playing with friends in Minecraft Dungeons is often more fun than playing alone. It's one of the game's primary draws: you and three friends frantically slicing through mobs to get glorious loot and treasure. Consequently, you might be wondering how to invite friends in Minecraft Dungeons

However, the process of setting up an online co-op session is a bit tricky. You can only invite friends and join sessions being hosted by your friends. You can't join or invite strangers, which is absolutely understandable. Minecraft Dungeons is best experienced with a common goal in mind, and players you're familiar with.

Below, we go over the steps for setting up an online co-op session in MC Dungeons

How to Invite Friends in Minecraft Dungeons

The option for inviting friends becomes available after you finish the Minecraft Dungeons tutorial. Luckily, the tutorial is only about 10 minutes long. 

Once you're done with the tutorial, you'll find yourself at your first camp. From there: 

  1. Select the "Online Game" menu
  2. Select the "Start Online Game" option
  3. Click the "Add Friend" button

You will see a list of users that are both online and offline. If you want to invite a friend who is online, simply click the "Invite" option.

If you want to join another player's multiplayer session, then do the following:

  1. Select the "Online Game" menu
  2. Select the "Start Online Game" option
  3. Go to the "Game Sessions" tab
  4. Press the "Refresh" button
  5. Join any available session

If everything goes right, you will immediately see your friends in your world, or you will find yourself in their game if you joined their session.

In either case, mission accomplished! You can now freely explore the world of Minecraft Dungeons together.

Related Guides

That's it on how to invite friends in Minecraft Dungeons. Be sure to check out even more Minecraft Dungeons guides right here.

]]>
Is Warface: Breakout Cross Platform? https://www.gameskinny.com/stt9l/is-warface-breakout-cross-platform https://www.gameskinny.com/stt9l/is-warface-breakout-cross-platform Wed, 27 May 2020 15:12:47 -0400 Daniel Hollis

Warface: Breakout is a new PvP shooter on PS4 and Xbox One that was surprise launched on May 26. Since similar games feature crossplay with friends, you might be wondering if Warface: Breakout is cross platform. 

The short answer is no: Warface: Breakout is not cross platform. But that's not the whole story. 

Warface: Breakout Cross Platform Play: Will It Ever be Added?

As it stands, Warface: Breakout is strictly limited to the console you purchased it on, meaning that you won't be able to play with Xbox One players if you're on PlayStation 4 or vice versa. 

However, while there's been no word on when or if it will be available, the developers said in 2019 that they plan to bring cross platform play to the original Warface in "Q2 2020." That means upcoming patches and updates could bring the functionality to Breakout.

Warface Franchise Producer Ivan Pabiarzhyn told Nintendo Life earlier this year that the team still wasn't ready to implement cross platform play in the original game, so while it's possible it will come to Warface: Breakout, the functionality might still be far away. 

---

Warface was released as a free-to-play multiplayer shooter in 2013 and is developed by Crytek Kiev, though this latest spin-off is developed by Allods Team and retails for $19.99.

Warface: Breakout is described as a return to the classic competitive shooters of yore, with its developers citing the immensely popular Counter-Strike as inspiration. Unlike the game it's inspired by, Warface: Breakout is crafted with console play in mind.

Sporting five maps and over 30 weapons, Warface: Breakout is expected to evolve over time with free seasonal content and has no plans to incorporate a battle pass for players to purchase.

So, there you have it. The skinny on Warface: Breakout cross platform play. Be sure to check back as we'll update this article if the ability to crossplay with friends is added to the game. 

]]>
Minecraft Dungeons Armor Enchantment Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/svl5e/minecraft-dungeons-armor-enchantment-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/svl5e/minecraft-dungeons-armor-enchantment-guide Mon, 25 May 2020 15:19:40 -0400 Ashley Shankle

While melee and ranged weapons' enchantments are different in Minecraft Dungeons, you may be happy to know that all armor shares the same pool of enchantments for you to work with so things don't get too complicated.

You will be granted an enchantment point to spend on enchantments on your weapons or armor each time you level up, allowing you to feel even more powerful with each level advancement.

Each enchantment can be upgraded for increasingly potent effects, up to a third, particularly powerful tier.

A single piece of equipment can have the same enchantment on it twice, or you can have multiple items with the same enchantment. In these situations, the bonuses will stack. Useful!

This guide goes over just armor enchantments. Be sure to check out our similar guide covering weapon enchantments, as well as our Minecraft Dungeons artifacts guide going over artifact effects and locations.

How to Return Enchantment Points in Minecraft Dungeons

You may not be able to undo enchantments placed on gear, but you can salvage the equipment to return the Enchantment Points you spent on them.

Once you switch to a new piece of equipment, salvage your old equipment to get your Enchantment Points back and spend them on your new gear. This means you should be salvaging anything you've invested points into and are not using anymore.

All you have to do to salvage your gear and get your Enchantment Points back is:

  1. Select the item that you're done with in your inventory
  2. Click/Select the big 'Salvage' button in the gear info window

Salvaging does destroy the item in question, so be careful you don't salvage something you still need.

Minecraft Dungeons Armor Enchantments

As with weapon enchantments, armor ones can be invested in up to three times to reach their maximum potential.

In the table below, all three levels' values are shown for easy planning. The level values are underlined in each instance.

Enchantments that are considered Powerful-tier rather than Common are italicized to help them stand out from the others.

Enchantment Effect
Burning Every 0.5 seconds deals some/more/lots of damage to all enemies in melee range.
Chilling Emits a blast every two seconds that reduces the movement and attack speed of nearby enemies by -20%/40%/60% for one second.
Cool Down Reduces the cooldown time between uses of your artifacts by -10%/19%/27%.
Cowardice When you are at full HP, you have +20%/30%/40% increased melee damage and range.
Deflect Grants a 20%/40%/60% chance to deflect incoming attacks.
Electrified Rolling zaps nearby enemies with lightning bolts, dealing some/more/lots of damage.
Explorer For every one hundred blocks explored on the map, you regain 0.3%/0.7%/1.0% health.
Final Shout When your health drops below 25%, all your artifacts are used (ignoring cooldown periods) up to every 12th/10th/8th second.
Fire Trail Rolling creates a trail of fire behind you, which deals some/more/lots of damage to mobs for four seconds.
Food Reserves Whenever you use a healing potion, you also create 1/2/3 random food item(s).
Frenzied While you're at less than half health, you get +10%/20%/30% increased melee and ranged speed.
Gravity Pulse A blast occurs every five seconds that pulls nearby enemies toward you, with range scaling 100%/150%/200%.
Health Synergy When activating any artifact, you regain 3%/4%/5% of your health.
Potion Barrier Whenever you use a healing portion, you take -90% damage for 5 seconds/7 seconds/9 seconds.
Protection Reduces damage taken by -6%/11%/15%.
Recycler Being hit by damage-inflicting projectiles will craft a small quiver of arrows every 30th/20th/10th projectile.
Snowball Fires a snowball at a nearby enemy every 5/3/1 second(s), briefly stunning it.
Soul Speed When you gather a soup, you gain a 1% stacking movement speed boost for 2 seconds/3 seconds/4 seconds.
Speed Synergy When activating any artifact, you gain +20% movement speed for 1 second/2 seconds/3 second.
Surprise Gift Whenever you use a healing potion, you create random consumables at a 50%/100%/150% chance to trigger.
Swiftfooted Rolling makes you move +30%/40%/50% faster for three seconds.
Thorns Whenever you take damage, you deal 100%/150%/200% back to the attacker.

 

That's it for our Minecraft Dungeons armor enchantment guide. Check out our other Minecraft Dungeons guides for more tips and tricks! 

]]>
Minecraft Dungeons Weapon Enchantment Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/y76ko/minecraft-dungeons-weapon-enchantment-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/y76ko/minecraft-dungeons-weapon-enchantment-guide Mon, 25 May 2020 15:19:38 -0400 Ashley Shankle

The enchantment system and artifact system give Minecraft Dungeons a unique twist on the ARPG gear affix systems we've come to know and love, and luckily, that unique twist is fairly easy to understand.

Each time you level up, you are granted an Enchantment Point to spend on enchantments for your equipment. Each enchantment can be upgraded to Level 3 for increasingly useful effects.

It's also worth knowing that a single piece of equipment can have the same enchantment on it twice, or you can have multiple items with the same enchantment. In these situations, the bonuses will stack.

This guide goes over just weapon enchantments. Be sure to check out our similar armor enchantments guide, as well as our Minecraft Dungeons artifacts guide going over artifact effects and locations.

How to Return Enchantment Points in Minecraft Dungeons

You cannot undo Enchantments placed on gear, but you can salvage the equipment to return the Enchantment Points you spent on them.

You should salvage any gear you're done using, whether weapons or armor. Once you switch to a new piece of equipment, salvage your old equipment to get your Enchantment Points back and spend them on your new gear.

All you have to do to salvage your gear and get your Enchantment Points back is:

  1. Select the item that you're done with in your inventory
  2. Click/Select the big "SALVAGE" button in the gear info window

Salvaging does destroy the item in question!

Minecraft Dungeons Melee Weapon Enchantments

Each enchantment can be invested in three times to reach maximum effectiveness.

In the table below, all three levels' values are shown and underlined to help with your planning.

Additionally, enchantments that are considered "Powerful," rather than Common, are italicized below.

Enchantment Effect
Animal Conduit Each soul you absorb grants 1%/2%/3% of health.
Chains Has a 30% chance to chain a cluster of mobs together and keep them bound for 1 second/2 seconds/3 seconds.
Committed Deal +0~50%/0~75%/0~100% bonus damage against already wounded enemies.
Critical Hit Gives you a 10%/15%/20% chance to inflict critical hits dealing triple damage.
Echo Some of your attacks can be followed up by another attack in rapid succession every 5 seconds/4 seconds/3 seconds.
Exploding Mobs explode, dealing 20%/40%/60% of the enemy's health as damage after defeated.
Fire Aspect Sets mobs on fire for three seconds, dealing some/more/lots of damage.
Freezing Slows mobs by -20%/-30%/-40% for three seconds.
Gravity This effect pulls mobs in range towards the weapon's impact point for 1 second/1.5 second/2 seconds.
 Leeching Defeating a mob heals you for 4%/6%/8% of the mob's max health.
Looting Increases the chance for mobs to drop consumables by 100%/200%/300%.
Poison Cloud Has a 30% chance to summon a poison cloud that deals some/more/lots of damage to enemies in an area for three seconds.
Prospector Find +100%/200%/300% more Emeralds on fallen enemies.
Radiance Has a 20% chance to spawn a circular area that heals all allies within it for some/more/lots of health.
Rampaging After defeating a mob, there is a 10% chance to increase your attack speed by +50% for 5 seconds/10 seconds/15 seconds.
Sharpness Makes your weapon sharper, causing it to deal +10%/21%/33% more damage.
Shockwave The last attack in a combo launches a shockwave, damaging enemies for some/more/lots of damage.
 Smithing Increases damage against the undead by +20%/30%/40%.
 Soul Siphon When you hit an enemy, you gain a 10% chance to grant you 3/6/9 extra souls.
Stunning 5%/10%/15% chance to temporarily stun enemies.
Swirling The last attack in a combo performs a swirling attack, damaging nearby enemies for some/more/lots of damage.
Thundering Has a 30% chance to summon a lightning strike that does some/more/lots of damage to nearby enemies.
Weakening Your Attacks decrease the attack damage of all nearby enemies by -20%/30%/40% for five seconds.

 

Minecraft Dungeons Ranged Weapon Enchantments

Just to state all of this again:

Each Enchantment can be invested in three times to reach maximum effectiveness.

In the table below, all three levels' values are shown and underlined to help with your planning.

Additionally, Enchantments that are considered "Powerful," rather than Common, are italicized below.

Enchantment Effect
Accelerate Increases attack speed by 8%/10%/12% for each consecutive shot. Resets one second after the attack.
Bonus Shot Firing a shot also fires a second shot at a nearby enemy. The second shot deals 10%/17%/25% damage.
Chain Reaction Has a 10%/20%/30% chance to fire five arrows in all directions on impact.
Enigma Resonator Gives a chance to triple damage based on the number of souls you have, granting a 0~15%/0~20%/0~25% chance.
Fuse Shot Every 5th/4th/3rd shot has a timed charge that explodes one second after impact, dealing 100% damage to nearby mobs.
Gravity This effect pulls mobs in range towards the weapon's impact point for 1 second/1.5 second/2 seconds.
 Growing Fired shots grow in the air, dealing 25%/50%/75% extra damage to distant targets.
Infinity 16%/32%/48% chance to immediately replenish an arrow after shooting.
Multishot Grants a 20%/30%/40% chance to fire five arrows at once.
Piercing Every 3rd/2nd/every arrow(s) gains the piercing effect, which allows them to fly through mobs
Poison Cloud Has a 30% chance to summon a poison cloud that deals some/more/lots of damage to enemies in an area for three seconds.
Power Boosts arrow damage by +10%/21%/33%.
Punch Boosts arrow pushback by +200%/300%/400%.
Radiance Shot Has a 20% chance to spawn a circular area that heals all allies within it for some/more/lots of health.
Rapid Fire Increases your attack speed by +10%/15%/20%.
Ricochet 20%/40%/60% chance for arrows to ricochet off mobs.
Supercharge Charged shots deal +20%/30%/40% increased damage and have more pushback.
Tempo Theft Steals 17%/33%/50% of a mob's movement speed and gives it to you for four seconds.
Unchanting Projectiles deal +50%/75%/100% more damage to enchanted enemies.
Wild Rage Hitting an enemy has a 20%/30%/40% chance to send it into a rage, making it hostile towards everyone.

 

That's it for our Minecraft Dungeons weapon enchantment guide. Check out our other Minecraft Dungeons guides for more tips and tricks!

]]>
Minecraft Dungeons Artifact Effects and Locations Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/1kx35/minecraft-dungeons-artifact-effects-and-locations-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/1kx35/minecraft-dungeons-artifact-effects-and-locations-guide Mon, 25 May 2020 15:19:35 -0400 Ashley Shankle

Sure, you've got armor to keep you protected in Minecraft Dungeons, but we all know artifacts are where it's really at.

Artifacts don't grant stats here, but they do give your character access to unique skills they can only use while the artifact is equipped. Luckily you can have up to three artifacts equipped at a time, and the skills of all three will be available to you.

Combine artifact skills with equipment enchantments, and you've got yourself a powerful array of tools to customize your active and passive abilities to your liking.

Pair this information up with our guides on the armor enchantments and weapon enchantments in Minecraft Dungeons, and you should be able to work up a build in no time.

Artifact Locations and Effects in Minecraft Dungeons

Artifact Effect Locations
Boots of Swiftness Gives a short boost to movement speed.
(5-second cooldown)
Creeper Woods
Creepy Crypt
Desert Temple
 Corrupted Beacon Fires a high-powered beam that continuously damages mobs for 185 artifact damage per second.
+1 Soul Gathering
Cacti Canyon
Pumpkin Pastures
Redstone Mines
Death Cap Mushroom Greatly increases attack and movement speed for 8.2 seconds.
(30-second cooldown)
Creeper Woods
Highblock Halls
Fireworks Arrow Shoots an exploding Fireworks Arrow, dealing 41 ranged damage.
(30-second cooldown)
Highblock Halls
Redstone Hills
Fishing Rod Pulls the closest mob to you, stunning it briefly.
(2-second cooldown)
Soggy Swamp
Creepy Crypt
Flaming Quiver Turns your regular arrows into Flaming Arrows, dealing 20 ranged damage per second over 7 arrows.
(30-second cooldown)
Pumpkin Pastures
Fiery Forge
Ghost Cloak Briefly gain Ghost Form, allowing you to move through mobs and absorb some damage.
(6-second cooldown)
Creepy Crypt
Harvester Releases Souls in an explosion.
(Requires Souls to use)
(1-second cooldown)
Soggy Swamp
Redstone Mines
Iron Hide Amulet Grants a defense boost.
(25-second cooldown)
Fiery Forge
Light Feather Lets you tumble through the air, stunning for 2.8 seconds and pushing back enemies as you go.
(3-second duration)
Pumpkin Pastures
Highblock Halls
Arch Haven
Lightning Rod Consume Souls to call down a bolt of lightning, dealing 6~60 artifact damage.
(Requires Souls to use)
Soggy Swamp
Obsidian Pinnacle
Love Medallion Turns up to three hostile mobs into allies for 10 seconds, before they disappear.
(30-second cooldown)
Highblock Halls
Arch Haven
Shock Powder Stuns nearby enemies.
(15-second cooldown)
Desert Temple
Obsidian Pinnacle
Tasty Bone Summons a wolf to aid you in battle.
(30-second cooldown)
Creeper Woods
Creepy Crypt
Redstone Mines
Torment Quiver Grants slow arrows that knock back mobs and pass through walls.
+1 Soul Gathering
(1-second cooldown)
Creeper Woods
Desert Temple
Totem of Regeneration Creates an AoE healing aura that regenerates health.
(25-second cooldown)
Soggy Swamp
Fiery Forge
Totem of Shielding Grants a shield that deflects projectiles.
(20-second cooldown)
Cacti Canyon
Desert Temple
Wind Horn Pushes enemies back and slows them.
(10-second cooldown)
Pumpkin Pastures
Cacti Canyon
Arch Haven
Wonderful Wheat Summons a Llama to fight alongside you.
(30-second cooldown)
Cacti Canyon
Arch Haven
Obsidian Pinnacle

 

That's it for our Minecraft Dungeons artifact effects and locations guide. If you're enjoying Minecraft Dungeons as much as we are, check out our other Minecraft Dungeons guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Pokemon TCG: Best Rebel Clash Decks for Standard https://www.gameskinny.com/e6x6g/pokemon-tcg-best-rebel-clash-decks-for-standard https://www.gameskinny.com/e6x6g/pokemon-tcg-best-rebel-clash-decks-for-standard Mon, 25 May 2020 10:44:35 -0400 Sergey_3847

Rebel Clash, the latest Pokemon TCG expansion, has been very influential on the standard format. Several new archetypes have been born out of the V and VMAX Pokemon combos, and this guide will show you the five best Rebel Clash decks for standard.

The decklists below aren't definitive, and are designed to give you an idea of what to put in your own builds. But of course, you can still use them as they are, since these exact lists have been dominating the standard meta.

Click the images with cards to enlarge.

Pikachu and Zekrom Tag Team

This deck is currently the biggest winner in Pokemon TCG with some exciting synergies and a few impactful new cards from the latest Rebel Clash set.

The basis of the list consists of Dedenne-GX, which draws you six cards when played; and Pikachu & Zekrom-GX, which fetches energy cards and deals with opponent's benched Pokemon.

The new additions to the deck are Boltund V, another energy fetcher and potentially a massive damage dealer; and Eldegoss V, which brings back important supporter cards from your discard pile.

Lightning energy plays a big role in this deck, and that's why there are 10 pieces of basic lightning energy cards and four copies of Speed Lightning Energy, which also draws you cards.

The most important supporter card in the list is the brand-new Boss's Orders, which switches benched Pokemon with active ones. This disrupts the opponent's gameplan and puts you in a clear advantage of the match-up.

Dragapult

This new archetype is based on the new evolution pair of Pokemon from Rebel Clash expansion: Dragapult V and Dragapult VMAX.

On its own Dragapult V isn't terribly dangerous, but if it evolves into the VMAX form, then you can distribute five damage counters on the opponent's benched Pokemon as you prefer. This will prompt your opponent to take a defensive position.

Horror Psychic Energy can help produce even more damage counters on opponent's Pokemon, including the active ones, which will further assert your dominance in the given match-up.

In case your Dragapult VMAX becomes threatened, you can use Scoop Up Net, a new supporter card, to bring him back into your hand and save the day.

Rillaboom

Another evolution Pokemon from Rebel Clash has a surprising breakthrough in this meta. Rillaboom V and Rillaboom VMAX are quite incredible, as it turns out.

The basic form of Rillaboom has a devastating 220 damage attack called Wood Hammer, which is unusual for a basic Pokemon card. When it evolves into the VMAX card, it gains a huge boost to its HP and has an ability to grow its attack by discarding grass energy.

Speaking of grass energy: this Rillaboom deck has a new Turffield Stadium card from Rebel Clash that fetches grass energy from your deck, which makes the combo so easy to execute.

Toxtricity

Poison effect is the star of this decklist, which focuses on three cards from Rebel Clash: Toxtricity V, Toxtricity VMAX, and Garbodor.

Toxtricity V must first poison an opponent's active Pokemon, and then it can hit for 180 points of damage using the Electric Riot ability.

This gets even better when evolved into VMAX, in which case Toxtricity deals 240 damage, which is more than enough to knockout almost any basic Pokemon and get a prize or two.

Garbodor helps this evolution team to set up these devastating beats using its Poisonous Puddle ability, which inflicts poison status effect on opponent's active Pokemon.

Cinderace

The current standard format wouldn't be complete without some kind of the Welder deck. Cinderace V and Cinderace VMAX fully embrace the power of Welder and fire energy in this meta.

Here you want to get to the VMAX evolution as quickly as possible and allow your opponent to attack your Cinderace with as much power as they can. Cinderace VMAX has a massive 320 HP pool, and soaks up all the damage dealt. Then, it uses all that extra damage and fights back.

This is definitely a very unusual approach to a Welder deck, but it works. That's why it is currently one of the top-tier decks in Pokemon TCG standard.

That's it on the best Rebel Clash decks for standard, and check out more Pokemon TCG guides right here.

]]>
Bless Unleashed Guide: How to Get an Estate https://www.gameskinny.com/hd22n/bless-unleashed-guide-how-to-get-an-estate https://www.gameskinny.com/hd22n/bless-unleashed-guide-how-to-get-an-estate Mon, 25 May 2020 10:37:58 -0400 Sergey_3847

Bless Unleashed, a free-to-play MMORPG, which is exclusive to Xbox One console, has been well received by the fans of the Bless franchise. The sequel offers players to build their own estate, and this guide will help you get an estate of your own as early as possible.

Surprisingly, many players are not aware of this feature. You should be, though. Since a property, such as estate can bring a lot of benefit to your gameplay.

How to Get an Estate in Bless Unchained

You can get your own estate as early as level 25.

In order to gain access to your own property you must first complete the "Old Friends and Allies" quest.

Here's what you need to do to be able to start this quest:

  1. Complete the first story campaign.
  2. Start a fight with the Gideon boss at the end of campaign.
  3. Put him down below 50% of health.
  4. Go to the Sperios Military District at the Capital City.
  5. Speak to NPC named Averdo Sorza.

Sorza will offer you a new "Entering the Estate" quest during the dialogue after fighting Gideon. You need to accept this quest and a whole new tab will appear in your world menu, through which you can access your estate.

What to Do in Estate

Hire Workers

Besides simply living and sleeping in your own estate you can hire workers, who can do a lot of useful work for you.

In order to hire a worker do the following:

  1. Enter the Tavern (one of the initial buildings in your estate).
  2. Approach any worker in the Tavern.
  3. Press "A" button to see their specialization.
  4. Press again and hold "A" to hire this worker.

The two most valuable types of workers are farmers and miners.

Capture Animals

Another building on your estate that you should be using is the Animal Pen. Here you can keep your livestock and mounts.

In order to capture an animal follow these steps:

  1. Approach and fight an animal in the wild.
  2. Drop its health to a possible minimum before death.
  3. A prompt will appear letting you capture this animal.
  4. Press and hold the "A" button to capture it.

Once the animal is captured, it will automatically enter your Animal Pen.

Unlock Other Buildings

In addition to the Tavern, Orchard, Animal Pen, and Mine you can unlock the following buildings in your estate:

  • Forge
  • Carpenter’s Shop
  • Leathercraft Workshop
  • Alchemy Workshop
  • Grocery Store

These buildings can be unlocked after obtaining their corresponding blueprints, which drop randomly from side quests, monster kills, or reward boxes.

---

That's it on how to get an estate in Bless Enleashed, and be sure to come back soon for even more related guides at GameSkinny.

]]>
How to Connect PS4 Controller to PC https://www.gameskinny.com/6yc6k/how-to-connect-ps4-controller-to-pc https://www.gameskinny.com/6yc6k/how-to-connect-ps4-controller-to-pc Fri, 22 May 2020 14:55:57 -0400 Daniel Hollis

Wondering how to connect a PS4 controller to your PC? We've got you covered. 

While the initial process for connecting an Xbox Controller to your PC isn't too strenuous, connecting a PS4 controller isn't as intuitive. Luckily, it's simpler than you might think. Once connected, the PS4 controller is incredibly easy to use on PC; you can even configure the trackpad as a workable mouse!

The DualShock 4 can also be used for a wide array of games across many launchers, such Steam, Origin, Epic Store, and more.

Here is what you'll need to get started:

  • A PS4 Dualshock controller
  • A Micro-USB cable
  • Dualshock 4 USB Wireless Adapter
    • If your PC doesn't support Bluetooth

How to Connect PS4 Controller to PC

1. Connecting to Steam via Wired Connection

This is perhaps your easiest and most efficient method for connecting your PS4 controller to your PC.

Ensure your Steam App is up to date to the latest client. Once this is done, simply plug your PS4 controller to the PC via micro-USB and you're good to go.

It's as easy as that. Just ensure that the games you're wanting to play are compatible with controller support. You can see if a game has controller support by going to the game's Steam page and looking at the panel on the far-right side of the page, just to the right of the game's pricing. 

Playing with Steam's Big Picture Mode is also advised, as it makes the application easier to use with a controller. It's not necessary, but it helps for a smoother experience.

If you're finding that the PS4 controller isn't working with compatible games, then that's because it can be a bit hit and miss. Unfortunately other game clients such as Epic Games and Origin aren't quite as user-intuitive as Steam and will require the use of DS4Windows or require you add the game(s) into Steam as a non-Steam game.

2. Connect to PC via Bluetooth

With Windows 10, your PC now has the ability to connect to peripherals via Bluetooth if your PC has a built-in Bluetooth card. It's a simple process and can be completed in a couple of minutes without any additional software.

To pair the devices, simply do the following:

  • Power on the controller.
  • Hold the PS button along with the Share button. Once the controller light starts flashing, it is in Bluetooth pairing mode.
  • Open settings on your PC.
  • Click Devices, then Bluetooth & other devices.
  • Go to Add Bluetooth or other device, then click Bluetooth.
  • Once in, click wireless controller. Your PS4 controller is now connected.

This is a quick and simple process. However, you may need to finetune the controller to ensure the experience runs as smoothly as possible. If so, then you're going to need to download DS4Windows.

3. Download DS4Windows

You can download a fantastic application known as DS4Windows, which works to ensure your PS4 controller connects to your PC with ease and allows a variety of customisation. The program allows you to set up controls for specific games, change the lightbar color, and enable even more in-depth controls such as touchpad sensitivity. 

To complete this process, you'll need to do the following:

  • Download the latest version of DS4Windows here.
  • Extract the DS4Windows file and DS4Update file.
  • Once both are extracted, run the DS4Windows installer.
  • Complete the installation, following the simple instructions on the screen.
  • Plug the PS4 controller into the PC to connect the controller.

If you then want to utilize it wirelessly via Bluetooth, then follow these options:

  • Hold the PS button in the center of the PS4 controller until the light bar begins to flash.
  • Open your Bluetooth settings on your PC.
  • Click connect to a Wireless Controller.
  • If asked for a pairing code, input 0000.
  • Go back to the installer and click finish.

From here, you can use DS4Windows to customize the experience to your liking with button mapping and even tailor your controls for specific games.

4. Using the Dualshock 4 USB Wireless Adapter

If your PC doesn't support Bluetooth and you want to play wirelessly, then this is your best bet. It is worth noting that Sony doesn't manufacture these peripherals anymore, so you will be paying reseller prices to obtain one.

If you manage to obtain one, it only takes a few easy steps to set up:

  • Plug the Dualshock 4 Wireless Adapter into your PC's USB port.
  • Once done, power on your PS4 controller.
  • The PC should then detect your controller, and you're good to go.

It's perhaps the simplest method, but it lacks the user controls of DS4Windows.

---

While not as straightforward as setting up an Xbox controller, the PS4 controller still manages to be an accessible means for PC gaming with a controller.

Once connected, you'll be able to use your controller for a variety of games on numerous clients. It's worth noting that you should check that any game you're playing is controller compatible before running out to purchase one, as not every game is.

Complete these simple steps on how to connect PS4 controller to PC, and you're good to go. Be sure to check GameSkinny for other guides of similar nature.

]]>
Terraria 1.4 Summoner Best Build Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/c4uva/terraria-14-summoner-best-build-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/c4uva/terraria-14-summoner-best-build-guide Fri, 22 May 2020 13:22:28 -0400 Sergey_3847

The last big update 1.4 for Terraria has just been released. It introduces a whole new set of whip weapons for the Summoner class.

If you're looking for the best build for this class, then this guide will provide you with a powerful set of gear, including their locations and crafting recipes.

This Summoner build focuses on powerful summon weapons and armor, including accessories with high damage potential.

Armor: Stardust Set

Stardust armor set is currently the best choice of armor for the Summoner due to its natural ability to boost summon weapons, which is essential for this class.

The set includes three items:

  • Stardust Helmet
  • Stardust Plate
  • Stardust Leggings

Each item requires two types of materials to craft in different quantities:

  • 45 total Stardust Fragments
  • 36 total Luminite Bars

Stardust Fragments can be obtained from the Stardust Pillar during the Lunar Events, which can be activated after beating the Lunatic Cultist boss in the Dungeon.

You will need 45x Stardust Fragments in total for all three items of the Stardust set.

Luminite Bars can be crafted from Luminite, a material which is dropped by the Moon Lord boss.

Luminite can be smelted into bars at the Ancient Manipulator crafting station. You will need 36x Luminite Bars for the Stardust armor.

Here is the exact breakdown of all necessary materials for each piece of the armor:

Item
Recipe
Stardust Helmet
10x Stardust Fragment
8x Luminite Bar
Stardust Leggings
15x Stardust Fragment
12x Luminite Bar
Stardust Plate
20x Stardust Fragment
16x Luminite Bar

 

Stardust Armor is also crafted at the Ancient Manipulator.

Main Advantages

When the set is complete, you get a permanent companion in the form of Stardust Guardian, who will attack all hostile creatures or NPCs automatically. As of 1.4 update the Guardian attacks enemies with a barrage of powerful punches.

Full set grants the following bonuses:

  • +66% minion damage
  • +5 minion capacity

This means that with a complete set and other buffs included in this build, you will be able to summon up to 11 minions. Such offensive power fully compensates for rather low defense abilities of the armor.

Weapons: Zenith, Terraprisma, Stardust Dragon Stuff

Zenith Sword

Zenith is the ultimate sword weapon in Terraria, and this is also the best choice for Summoner that wants to rely on strong offensive tools.

This sword can be crafted using other ten swords from the game. Here they are:

  • Terra Blade
  • Meowmere
  • Star Wrath
  • Influx Waver
  • Horseman's Blade
  • Seedler
  • Starfury
  • Bee Keeper
  • Enchanted Sword
  • Copper Shortsword

Most of these swords drop from Moon Lord. When you have all ten swords in your possession, you can craft Zenith at the Mythril or Orichalcum anvils.

Terraprisma

This is the newest summon weapon in the 1.14 update, which also happens to be the most powerful summon weapon of all.

However, instead of summoning minions it simply creates more copies of itself that can deal with multiple enemies at a time.

This weapon can be obtained by defeating the Empress of Light boss at the Hallow. Follow this guide for a complete breakdown of this boss fight.

Stardust Dragon Staff

This is another highly potent summon weapon, which summons a flying dragon. Unlike any other summon weapon, reusing Stardust Dragon Staff simply makes the dragon longer instead of creating another copy of it.

This means that the staff is especially useful against single targets, such as bosses or powerful enemies, while Zenith and Terraprisma will do a better job with a horde of enemies.

You can craft Stardust Dragon Staff at the Ancient Manipulator using 18x Stardust Fragments.

Summoner Accessories

Summoner Emblem

Minions from summon weapons are quite effective on their own, but you can make them deal even more damage with the help of the Summoner Emblem, which increases it by 15%.

This accessory drops from the Wall of Flesh boss, which can be located in The Underworld.

Avenger Emblem

Since you'll be using several types of weapons, including summon weapons, you need to increase the damage of your weapons. This accessory grants 12% bonus damage to all your weapons.

Avenger Emblem can be crafted at the Tinkerer's Workshop with the help of this recipe:

  • 1x Warrior Emblem
  • 5x Soul of Might
  • 5x Soul of Sight
  • 5x Soul of Fright
Destroyer Emblem

This emblem provides a damage bonus to your character. It adds 10% to your overall damage and 8% to your ritical hit chance.

Destroyer Emblem can be crafted at the Tinkerer's Workshop using Avenger Emblem and Eye of the Golem.

Necromantic Scroll

You can increase the number of your summoned minions by one with the help of this accessory, as well as increase your summon damage by 10%.

Necromantic Scroll drops from Mourning Wood mini-boss, which can be encountered during the Pumpkin Moon event.

Papyrus Scarab

This accessory stacks with Necromantic Scroll and adds an extra summon minion and 15% bonus to summon damage.

Papyrus Scarab can be crafted at the Tinkerer's Workshop using Necromantic Scroll and Hercules Beetle.

Celestial Shell

The last one is probably the most important accessory you can have for your character. It increases your damage, melee speed, critical hit chance, life regeneration, defense, mining speed, and minion knockback.

This amazing accessory can be crafted at the Tinkerer's Workshop using Celestial Stone and Moon Shell.

That's all on the best build for Summoner class, and be sure to check more Terraria guides right here.

]]>
Maneater Guide — How to Reach Hidden Collectibles on Land https://www.gameskinny.com/e8zdj/maneater-guide-how-to-reach-hidden-collectibles-on-land https://www.gameskinny.com/e8zdj/maneater-guide-how-to-reach-hidden-collectibles-on-land Fri, 22 May 2020 09:00:02 -0400 Jonny Foster

If you've sunk a few hours into Maneater, you might have noticed some tantalizing, "hidden" collectibles hovering just out of reach on land. Tripwire Interactive has done a good job of hiding license plates in plain sight, often placing them on pier heads and atop shoreline rubble. 

There are also some tricky side missions that task you with killing humans who stay frustratingly far from your watery domain.

Fortunately, we have some useful tips to help you reach the land and survive for a little longer.  

Maneater Guide — How to Reach Hidden Collectibles on Land

First, let's start with the simplest advice. 

The Amphibious evolution will drastically increase the amount of time you can survive on land, as well as increase your land speed.

It's locked behind story content in the middle chapters of Maneater, though, but you also shouldn't be attempting any of the harder-to-reach license plates until the middle of the game for another very important reason: the Air Lunge

The ability to lunge out of the water is available from your beginnings as a humble Pup shark, but the real utility comes once you've reached the Adult, Elder, and Mega stages. 

Once you've grown to the latter stages of sharkdom, you can press "B" or "LT" once you're in the air to gain a small boost of speed and height.

This can be done twice once you've grown to the Adult stage, while pressing "RT" will lunge you towards a target if you're locked on.

Combining these, the optimal strategy for reaching collectibles that are out of water looks like:

  1. Breach the water ("B" while Knifing or "LT" while swimming to the surface)
  2. Wait a split second, then Air Lunge ("B" or "LT")
  3. Repeat Step 2 if you have Air Lunge Level 2 unlocked.
  4. Finally, attack the target with "RT."

This sequence can also be used to reach humans in those pesky side missions we mentioned earlier.

It's also worth knowing that you don't usually have to eat them, so killing multiple humans with a Tailwhip ("LB") is often the quickest way to complete missions on land before you have to return to the water.

---

That's it for how to reach hidden collectibles on land. For more on Maneater, check out our other guides here

]]>
Maneater: How to Reach Infamy Rank 10 & Unlock the Bio-Electric Set https://www.gameskinny.com/doiv7/maneater-how-to-reach-infamy-rank-10-unlock-the-bio-electric-set https://www.gameskinny.com/doiv7/maneater-how-to-reach-infamy-rank-10-unlock-the-bio-electric-set Fri, 22 May 2020 09:00:02 -0400 Jonny Foster

In Maneater, you need to raise your Infamy Rank if you want to go from a no-name scamp to a legendary menace. Along the way, you'll also unlock all five pieces of the Bio-Electric set by increasing your Infamy Rank, so why not kill two birds with one stone? 

But how do we raise our Infamy in Maneater

Like most watery horror films, it starts with some good old-fashioned human killing. These can be innocent bystanders on land, unsuspecting swimmers, or leisurely boaters, it doesn't really matter. 

You just need to kill enough humans to raise your threat level, which eventually causes hunters to begin searching for you. 

Maneater: How to Reach Infamy Rank 10 & Unlock the Bio-Electric Set

The Hunter Becomes the Hunted

Taking down the first few waves of hunters shouldn't really be a problem, but their potency and numbers quickly start to stack up.

The best tactic for turning the hunters into your next meal starts with swimming in large circles, ducking in and out of range of the hunter’s boats.

This will make it harder for them to hit you repeatedly, and gives you a better angle of approach if they don't see you coming. Any time they start targeting you, hit "RB" to dodge away, and they won't be able to touch you. 

You want to Knife through the water by holding "LT" while you’re swimming along the surface, then leap out of the water with "B" and hit "RT" to lunge through the air at a hunter and grab them from their boat. 

If you’re low on health, keep pressing "RT" to eat them and regain some health. You can also use them as projectiles to knock more hunters into the water; hold enemies in your mouth by holding "RT" down, then press "LB" to Tailwhip them at another target

This lets you deal with multiple threats in quick succession, as the more hunters you knock into the water, the less there will be trying to shoot you. 

Evolution is a Shark's Best Friend

Unlike your threat meter, your Infamy rank doesn’t decrease, so don’t feel the need to try and hit Infamy 10 in one go. 

In fact, Bone Body — one of the most useful evolutions for fighting higher-leveled hunters — doesn’t unlock until the 5th story chapter, so you’ll want to wait until you unlock this before taking on the higher ranks. 

Hearty, gained by defeating Bobbie Bojangles at Infamy Rank 2, and Mineral Digestion at Infamy Rank 3 are two vital evolutions that should be secured early and upgraded to their maximum level. 

Once you have reached the higher Infamy ranks, upgrading the Bone set of evolutions is important to defeating the bigger hunter boats, with the Bone Body and Bone Fin evolutions being particularly important.

With these two, your dodge attack, and your Y-button ability, will do extreme damage to the stronger boats that start spawning from Infamy Rank 6 and onward.

You can swap to this technique and pretty much ignore the hunters once you’ve leveled the evolutions high enough. 

After this, reaching Infamy Rank 10 should be a gentle walk in the… uh… ocean? 

Closing Tips & Tricks

If you're finding the hunter fights difficult, here are a few final tips to give you a fighting edge. 

Firstly, don't be afraid to disengage. If you turn and swim away, the boats won't be fast enough to catch you, especially if you're in an area where you can dive deep enough to evade their sight entirely. 

You should also use this time to heal up; eating fish, other predators, and even humans will replenish your health bar

Finally, if reinforcements stop spawning at any point while you're trying to raise your Infamy and your threat level starts to drop, submerge and search for any Hunter Divers. These divers often count as active units and unless you kill them, new reinforcements won’t spawn. 

---

That's it for our Maneater guide on how to reach Infamy Rank 10 and unlock the Bio-Electric Set. For more on Maneater, why not check out our review

]]>
Crusader Kings 3 Preorder and Editions Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/y9jo8/crusader-kings-3-preorder-and-editions-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/y9jo8/crusader-kings-3-preorder-and-editions-guide Thu, 21 May 2020 14:30:49 -0400 GS_Staff

Crusader Kings 3 has been a long time coming. Grand strategy fans have dutifully played the amazing Crusader Kings 2 since 2012, and to date, that game has seen a whopping 71 DLC packs, including new portraits, music, and scenarios. To say its time for a new ruler to ascend the throne is quite the understatement. 

Releasing on September 1, 2020, for PC, Crusader Kings 3 will be a more complete experience than CK2 at launch, according to Paradox Interactive. Though that potentially means less DLC than Crusader Kings 2, that doesn't mean there won't be expansions and other DLC packs for CK3 down the road. 

Read on to see what each edition of Crusader Kings 3 contains, as well as what additions can be expected after the game launches. We also break down how much the expansion pass and DLCs will be separately. 

Crusader Kings 3 Preorder and Editions Guide

Crusader Kings 3 Standard Edition

The Standard Edition of Crusader Kings 3 comes with the base game and the Garments of the Holy Roman Empire preorder bonus. It will set you back $49.99 and is currently available on several storefronts, including the Paradox Store and Steam: 

Crusader Kings 3 Royal Edition

The CK3 Royal Edition comes with the base game and the Garments of the Holy Roman Empire preorder bonus, as well as the game's expansion pass. It costs $74.99 and is available on: 

The expansion pass gives you access to three DLC packs and the Fashion of the Abbasid Court pack, which contains Middle Eastern and North African clothing sets. 

What's in the Crusader Kings 3 Expansion Pass? How Much Does It Cost? 

As of this writing, Paradox hasn't shared very little information about the content planned for the expansion pass. According to a blog post on the Paradox website, players can expect to receive: 

  • Two flavor packs
  • One major expansion

For those who do not pick up the Royal Edition of Crusader Kings 3, the expansion pass will be available on September 1. It will retail separately for $34.99

How Much are the Crusader Kings 3 Expansions and Flavor Packs? 

Of course, all of the Crusader Kings 3 expansions and flavor packs will be available for purchase separately when they release. According to Paradox, here's what they will cost: 

  • Flavor packs: $6.99 each
  • Major expansions: $29.99 each
  • Garments of the Holy Roman Empire: $2.99
  • Fashion of the Abbasid Court: $2.99

As the developer points out, it's far more cost-effective to purchase the Royal Edition of the game because it includes all of the above for a fraction of the cost. 

---

That's it for our Crusader Kings 3 preorder and editions guide. For more on the upcoming grand strategy title, be sure to check out our hands-on impressions here

]]>
Terraria NPC Happiness Guide to Pylons & Cheap Prices https://www.gameskinny.com/o27av/terraria-npc-happiness-guide-to-pylons-cheap-prices https://www.gameskinny.com/o27av/terraria-npc-happiness-guide-to-pylons-cheap-prices Thu, 21 May 2020 13:02:53 -0400 Ashley Shankle

Terraria's new happiness system for NPCs is one of the many surprise additions to the Journey's End update, and it's one you should familiarize yourself with to make use of the new Pylons, which allow for teleportation between one another.

Pylons are also new to Terraria, and become available for purchase from vendor NPCs that are sufficiently happy. You obviously want to rush at least a couple of Pylons so you can open teleportation between them.

The happier an NPC is, the lower their vendor prices will be; and if an NPC is elated, they'll sell you a Pylon corresponding to the biome they're in for less than 10 gold. What a steal!

Before you can get your hands on some Pylons (which we will explain in more detail soon enough), let's talk about how that whole thing works as well as exactly how you can make your NPCs happy.

How to Get Pylons and How They Work

Pylons allow you to teleport from one to the other, as long as you have at least two available to you.

Once a vendor NPC is happy enough, they will have for sale a Pylon corresponding to the biome they are in.

For instance, if the Dryad and Witch Doctor are together in a house in the jungle (satisfying their happiness needs), both will have Jungle Pylons for sale as they will be in their preferred biome with an NPC they like, and they are not overcrowded.

The following Pylons can be purchased from happy NPCs:

  • Cavern Pylon
  • Forest Pylon
  • Snow Pylon
  • Desert Pylon
  • Jungle Pylon
  • Mushroom Pylon
  • Hallow Pylon

The Cavern Pylon can be purchased if the NPC is housed underground and not in a specific biome.

If your NPCs are living somewhere with two biomes, you may be able to buy Pylons for both biomes from them.

Additionally, once you complete the Bestiary, you will be able to buy a Universal Pylon from the Zoologist regardless of her happiness.

How Pylons Work

There are two requirements for getting Pylons to work:

  1. Pylons will only work when near at least two NPCs who have a home
  2. Pylons will only work when placed in their corresponding biome

I'm not entirely sure what range the NPCs need to be from the Pylons to work, but they do not necessarily have to be squished into one room.

When you come close to a Pylon after you already have two up, you will be able to click on a Pylon once nearby to select another one on the world map to teleport to.

This system forces you to divide up your NPCs permanently if you want to continue to use the Pylon Network, but Pylon use is not tied to NPC happiness.

You can divide your NPCs up however you like once you've bought Pylons from them, but remember their happiness affects their sales prices for other goods as well.

How to Make Terraria NPCs Happy

Giving your resident NPCs a more fulfilling life isn't something we really had to think about before Journey's End, and you only need to consider it up to a point even now.

NPC happiness affects whether they will sell Pylons and the prices of their goods. It is based on:

  • The biome they live in
  • How many other NPCs are nearby
  • Which NPCs are nearby

As a general rule of thumb when trying to make your NPCs happy, keep them to two or three NPCs in a 25 to 30 tile area.

You'll be able to figure out where to house your NPCs using the table below, based off their preferred and disliked biomes and fellow NPCs.

Because you only need eight separate biome Pylons, you only need to focus on eight vendor NPCs. Pick and choose the ones you want to focus on!

NPC Pref. Biome Dislike Biome NPC Likes NPC Dislikes
Angler Ocean Desert Party Girl
Demolitionist
Tax Collector
Tavernkeep
Arms Dealer Desert Snow Steampunker
Nurse
Demolitionist
Golfer
Clothier Caverns Hallow Tax Collector
Truffle
Nurse
Mechanic
Cyborg Snow Jungle Pirate
Steampunker
Stylist
Wizard
Zoologist
Demolitionist Caverns Ocean Mechanic
Tavernkeep
Arms Dealer
Goblin Tinkerer
Dryad Jungle Desert Truffle
Witch Doctor
Zoologist
Angler
Golfer
Dye Trader Desert Forest Painter
Arms Dealer
Pirate
Steampunker
Goblin Tinkerer Caverns Jungle Dye Trader
Mechanic
Stylist
Clothier
Golfer Forest Caverns Painter
Zoologist
Pirate
Merchant
 Guide Forest Ocean Clothier
Zoologist
Steampunker
Painter
Mechanic Snow Caverns Cyborg
Goblin Tinkerer
Clothier
Arms Dealer
Merchant Forest Desert Nurse
Golfer
Angler
Tax Collector
Nurse Hallow Snow Wizard
Arms Dealer
Party Girl
Dryad
Zoologist
Painter Jungle
Ocean
Forest Dryad
Party Girl
Truffle
Cyborg
Party Girl Hallow Caverns Wizard
Stylist
Zoologist
Merchant
Tax Collector
Pirate Ocean Caverns Angler
Tavernkeep
Guide
Stylist
Steampunker Desert Jungle Cyborg
Painter
Dryad
Wizard
Party Girl
Stylist Ocean Snow Pirate
Dye Trader
Goblin Tinkerer
Tavernkeep
Tavernkeep Hallow Snow Goblin Tinkerer
Demolitionist
Dye Trader
Guide
Tax Collector Snow Hallow Party Girl
Merchant
Mechanic
Demolitionist
Truffle Mushroom  N/A Dryad
Guide
Witch Doctor
Clothier
Witch Doctor Jungle Hallow Guide
Dryad
Clothier
Nurse
Truffle
Wizard Hallow Ocean Merchant
Golfer
Cyborg
Witch Doctor
Zoologist Forest Desert Witch Doctor
Golfer
Angler
Arms Dealer

 

Found this guide helpful? We've got plenty of other guides for Terraria:

That's it for Terraria NPC happiness, pylons, and cheap prices! Keep your eyes peeled for more Terraria guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Tony Hawk's Pro Skater 1+2 Remastered Preorder and Editions Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/45y15/tony-hawks-pro-skater-12-remastered-preorder-and-editions-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/45y15/tony-hawks-pro-skater-12-remastered-preorder-and-editions-guide Thu, 21 May 2020 10:30:21 -0400 GS_Staff

There might be sixteen games in the Tony Hawk's Pro Skater franchise, but outside of THPS Underground, the first two games are regarded as the best. Luckily, Activision knows that the 2012 Tony Hawk's Pro Skater HD left many fans wanting, and the developer is bringing the seminal entries back in stunning 4K later this year in Tony Hawk's Pro Skater 1+2 Remastered

The game will be coming to the PC, PS4, and Xbox One on September 4. It is an Epic Games exclusive on the PC. 

If you're looking to drop into the halfpipe as soon as the skatepark opens, you'll be glad to know that the game is already up for preorder on several different storefronts. As expected, there are also several different editions up for grabs. 

Tony Hawk's Pro Skater 1+2 Remastered Preorder and Editions Guide

Tony Hawk's Pro Skater 1+2 Remastered Standard Edition

The Standard Edition includes the base game and will set you back $39.99. Preordering this version of THPS 1+2 Remastered will give you access to the game's Warehouse Demo, which will release sometime before the game launches. However, Activision has not yet shared a release timeframe for the demo. 

As a preorder bonus, GameStop is offering a unique mini fingerboard, sporting the THPS 1+2 logo and a variant of Hawk's iconic Birdhouse design. 

PlayStation 4

Xbox One

PC

Tony Hawk's Pro Skater 1+2 Remastered Digital Deluxe Edition

This version costs $49.99 and comes with the base game, as well as the preorder Warehouse Demo. It also includes:

  • "The Ripper" character,  seen on many iconic Powell Peralta boards
  • Retro outfits for Tony Hawk, Steve Caballero, and Rodney Mullen
  • Retro content for Create-A-Skater mode
    • boards, clothes, shows, and other gear 

Xbox One

PC

Tony Hawk's Pro Skater 1+2 Remastered Collector's Edition

One of the cheaper and more affordable Collector's Editions out there, this one will set you back a meager $99.99. That's not too bad considering you get the base game, all Digital Deluxe content, and a limited-edition full-sized skateboard. 

PlayStation 4

Xbox One

That's it for our Tony Hawk's Pro Skater 1+2 Remastered preorder and editions guide. We'll be sure to update this if the game becomes available for early purchase on other storefronts, such as the PlayStation Store. 

]]>
Call of Duty: Warzone Bunker 11 — How to Find It and the Hidden Phones https://www.gameskinny.com/rkiw4/call-of-duty-warzone-bunker-11-how-to-find-it-and-the-hidden-phones https://www.gameskinny.com/rkiw4/call-of-duty-warzone-bunker-11-how-to-find-it-and-the-hidden-phones Wed, 20 May 2020 16:56:17 -0400 Daniel Hollis

By now you've probably heard the news about multiple vaults across Call of Duty: Warzone's map opening up for players. But what you may not have heard about is the secret Bunker 11, or the mysterious phones used to unlock it. 

The 11th vault is one begging for players to unearth its secrets. While the other bunkers and vaults require randomly dropped red access key cards to unlock, this particular one requires a different approach. We're here to help you be well on your way to venturing inside.

How to Access Bunker 11 in Call of Duty: Warzone

Bunker 11 Location

One of the first things you're going to want to know is where the 11th bunker actually is. The picture of the map below will help you find it. It's the area marked in blue, in the extreme north of Verdansk

How to Unlock Bunker 11

The process for unlocking the vault is a lot more complicated than the other 10, but it's perhaps less reliant on luck. It involves finding multiple phones that must correspond. To break it down, you must do the following:

  • You must first locate a phone that provides you with an activation code in Morse code.
  • The Morse code relates to other phones, which are registered to a particular Russian number.
  • You must activate the three phones that the code is referring to in order.
  • Once this is done, the bunker is unlocked.
How to Find the Phones and Decipher the Code

It might seem a ridiculously hard task to accomplish, especially if you don't speak Russian. However, Reddit user, StrangerRobjin, has broken it down easily for players by labeling the phones with the particular code they're associated with.

Below is their guide which easily showcases the multiple phones across the map and how to decipher the code. Click the image below to expand:

It's a lot simpler than it looks and this easy to digest guide is your best bet at being able to crack the code and raid the vault.

What's Inside the Bunker 11?

You're probably wondering if all this effort is worth it. Inside bunker 11, you will find an exclusive blueprint for the Mud Drauber MP7. Alongside that is a multitude of Easter eggs, which seem to reference the popular Call of Duty: Black Ops series and perhaps teasing the next upcoming Call of Duty game.

This video by YouTuber, eColiEspresso, showcases the entirety of the 11th bunker and what secrets it holds:

It's yet to be seen if these vaults will play into anything bigger, but the inclusion of this secret 11th bunker seems to point to more Easter egg hunts to come.

That's it on how to unlock Bunker 11 in Call of Duty: Warzone. For more on Activision's latest battle royale title, be sure to check out our other Warzone guides

]]>
Call of Duty: Warzone Bunker Locations https://www.gameskinny.com/8d2el/call-of-duty-warzone-bunker-locations https://www.gameskinny.com/8d2el/call-of-duty-warzone-bunker-locations Wed, 20 May 2020 14:20:45 -0400 Daniel Hollis

If you've been diving into Call of Duty: Warzone regularly, you've more than likely come across several mysterious bunkers. These bunker locations have been locked with seemingly no access, but the recent update this week has rectified that, giving players access to these vaults.

Now, you are able to unravel their secrets and gain access to each of them. Each bunker contains an assortment of chests and goodies to give you an advantage in the coming battle. These vaults also contain another locked door which as of now is inaccessible, but could become available in future updates.

How to Open bunkers in Call of Duty: Warzone

Gather Red Access Key Cards

Unfortunately, getting a red access key card requires a bit of skill and foraging across the map. You'll need to scrounge through multiple crates across Verdansk in the hopes of scoring one. Players seem to believe that legendary crates have a higher drop rate, but you're able to receive one from any type of crate. 

It's also worth noting that picking up scavenger missions will highlight specific crates to you and your squad, so it's worth diving into a few of those too.

Call of Duty: Warzone Bunker Locations

There are 10 bunkers across the map that are unlocked by using the red access key card. The map below showcases each of the bunker locations:

Once you've gathered a red access key card, simply make your way to the nearest bunker to use it. The key cards aren't bunker specific, so you can use them on any bunker or vault of your choosing.

How to Unlock Bunkers and Vaults in Call of Duty: Warzone

Gathering the red access key card is the hardest step, unlocking them is easy in comparison. 

Outside of each bunker is a keypad, which up until this point has proven useless. With the red access key card, though, you'll be able to easily interact with the keypad to unlock the vault and plunder its contents.

---

Whether more secrets lie inside these bunker locations remains to be seen, but be sure to check GameSkinny for any updates and Call of Duty: Warzone guides here.

]]>
Terraria Lava Fishing Guide: How to Fish and What You'll Catch https://www.gameskinny.com/09z1r/terraria-lava-fishing-guide-how-to-fish-and-what-youll-catch https://www.gameskinny.com/09z1r/terraria-lava-fishing-guide-how-to-fish-and-what-youll-catch Tue, 19 May 2020 13:55:34 -0400 Jason Coles

Terraria Journey's End has brought with it a huge amount of new stuff for players to master and find. One of the most relaxing (or least, depending on your point of view) comes in the form of Lava Fishing, which takes the pastime of fishing and makes it super hot. 

Lava Fishing isn't just a good way to kill time, though: It's also a great way to find some of the new items in Terraria 1.4. By lava fishing, you'll be able to craft some new gear and even learn how to manipulate lava at will. So, here's what you need to know about Lava Fishing in Terraria

How to Fish in Lava

To actually cast your line into the lava, you need the right equipment first. The best rod is the Hotline Hook fishing rod, which allows you to fish in lava with no other specialized gear. 

To obtain Hotline Hook, you need to first play in Hardmode. Then complete 25 Angler quests. After the 25th quest, you'll a 1/75 chance of getting the Hotline Hook after an Angler quest. 

You can also use the Lavaproof Fishing Hook. You can get it by opening Obsidian Crates, which you can catch by fishing in the Underworld. The advantage of this hook is that you can use a better rod and any bait you want.  

It's worth noting that fishing in lava has its risks; If anything decides to knock you while you're waiting for a bite, there's a chance you'll fall in the lava and die, so it's best to keep a close eye on things  or fish with a summon protecting you. 

What You Can Catch While Lava Fishing

Lava Fishing allows you to catch some really interesting items, all of which are useful in a variety of different ways. The fish you can catch are:

  • Flarefin Koi
  • Obsidifish
  • Obsidian Swordfish. 

The first two are ingredients for crafting the Inferno Potion, which sets fire to all enemies that come near you. The Swordfish can be made into a powerful spear. 

You can also reel in a Bottomless Lava Bucket, which allows you to produce infinite lava wherever you want; the Lava Absorbent Sponge, which can remove lava; and the Demon Conch, which can teleport you to the Underworld. 

It's easy to see why these are all really useful — and worthwhile — items, and the possibilities they unlock really open up the game. This is especially true if you want to watch the world burn, in which case, that Bottomless Lava Bucket is really going to be your favorite item. 

 

That's it on Terraria lava fishing. For more, including tips on other Journey's End additions, be sure to check out our other Terraria guides

]]>
How to Make and Plant Gemcorns in Terraria 1.4 Journey's End https://www.gameskinny.com/jdwdu/how-to-make-and-plant-gemcorns-in-terraria-14-journeys-end https://www.gameskinny.com/jdwdu/how-to-make-and-plant-gemcorns-in-terraria-14-journeys-end Tue, 19 May 2020 13:36:33 -0400 Jason Coles

There are lots of cool changes in the Terraria 1.4 update, Journey's End. One of the coolest, at least aesthetically, is the Gemcorn. If you're here, that means you need to know how to make and plant Gemcorns, and that's where we come in. 

Gemcorns grow into Gem Trees, and Gem Trees are a fun way to get more gems, but they also help make underground lairs look far more interesting, and style is everything. So, here's what you need to know.

How to Make Gemcorns

Making Gemcorns is actually very easy, you don't even need a workbench as you can combine them by hand. Try not to think too hard about how that's possible, though... 

Anyway, to create a Gemcorn, you need a gemstone and an acorn. Then, you just squish them together in crafting.

This works with:

  • Amber
  • Amethyst
  • Diamond
  • Emerald
  • Ruby
  • Sapphire
  • Topaz.

Each will produce a Gemcorn of the corresponding type. Those, in turn, will grow into a Gem Tree that produces those gems. Super simple. 

How to Plant Gemcorns

Planting Gemcorns is the same as planting any other kind of acorn. However, you can't do it on the surface world. Instead, you have to do it in the Underground or below, and you can only plant Gemcorns in stone

Unlike normal trees, Gem Trees grow when there is no light, meaning any light source near them will actually slow them down. Ideally, you want to plant them in the pitch black

Once they're fully grown, you can chop them down, and they'll produce some Stone Blocks, some Gemcorns, and some Gems too. This can make them pretty useful for generating money early on in a game, but also great for making certain items too.

Of course, you might just want them to look flashy, and we respect that. Either way, that's everything you need to know about how to grow and plant Gemcorns. For more, be sure to check out our other Terraria guides

]]>
Terraria: How to Make Jungle and Glowing Mushroom Biomes https://www.gameskinny.com/jbyc6/terraria-how-to-make-jungle-and-glowing-mushroom-biomes https://www.gameskinny.com/jbyc6/terraria-how-to-make-jungle-and-glowing-mushroom-biomes Tue, 19 May 2020 13:29:52 -0400 Ashley Shankle

There are not a ton of ways to affect which biomes populate your world in Terraria, but it is possible to manually add and grow two of them. We'll go over what those biomes are and how to create them in this guide.

Both the Jungle and Glowing Mushroom biomes can be grown manually to customize your world and give it a little more pizazz, or to farm the biomes' unique materials.

There are two methods you can use to grow either of these biomes, and even one method to grow Corruption, Crimson, or Hallow that also allows you to remove them. We'll go into that a bit further down.

How to Create a Jungle Biome in Terraria

Every world generated in Terraria has at least one Jungle, but maybe it's not big enough for your tastes or maybe you just want to have all those Forest biomes swallowed up by the infinitely cooler and significantly riskier Jungle.

Whatever your reason, it's an effort-intensive process to pull off. Though less so for Journey mode characters, which we'll touch on briefly as well.

To spread or create a Jungle biome, you need two things:

  1. 80 Mud
  2. A similar number of Jungle Grass Seeds

Jungle Grass Seeds can be obtained by destroying plants growing in an already-established Jungle biome. You only need to run around swinging your weapon to destroy plants, but be aware there is a mere 1/100 chance a plant will drop a Jungle Grass Seed.

If you are playing a Journey mode character, you only need 25 Jungle Grass Seeds to research and dupe the seeds infinitely.

Mud can be found fairly easily, either from a top Jungle biome or underground.

You'll want to place at least 80 mud tiles next to each other over an expanse. If you're starting above ground, clear out any trees in the area and use the new tile swapping feature to easily swap the dirt with the mud blocks you've accumulated.

From there, you select your seeds and place them directly on the mud to get the process started.

Now, it's worth noting that Jungle Grass spreads at a rate of three to five tiles per day. This means you do not need 80 Jungle Grass Seeds to get started, especially if you spread them out by a few tiles on the mud you've placed.

After a few days, the area you've covered will begin to convert into a Jungle biome, Maneaters and all.

As an aside, you can place 80 Lihzahrd Bricks near each other to spawn Jungle biome enemies, without the plant life and other aspects of the Jungle biome.

Lihzahrd Bricks can be found in Jungle Temples and require one of the higher tier Hardmode pickaxes to dig up, such as one of the Luminite Pickaxe or Drill.

How to Create a Glowing Mushroom Biome in Terraria

Creating a Glowing Mushroom biome is very similar to creating a Jungle biome, but most players will need to make a Glowing Mushroom biome at one point or another to get the NPC Truffle to spawn.

As with creating a Jungle biome, you'll need:

  1. 80 Mud
  2. A similar number of Mushroom Grass Seeds

Truffle requires that you have an above ground Glowing Mushroom biome, and that there be a house available, before he will come to your world and settle.

Mushroom Grass Seeds drop from the plants in a natural Glowing Mushroom biome underground, but at the low chance of 1/40 plants.

It can take some time to get enough seeds, but you do not need a full 80 as Mushroom Grass does spread at a rate of three to five tiles per day.

Journey mode characters can simply collect 25 seeds, research, and infinitely duplicate them to save some time.

As with the Jungle biome instructions above, clear out the trees over an 80-tile or more wide area and replace all the dirt with mud blocks. Then, sweep over those tiles again placing Mushroom Grass Seeds. After some time, they will grow into a full-on biome.

You do not need a full 80 seeds to get a Glowing Mushroom biome started, as you can spread them out across the mud you've placed and let the grass spread naturally to create the biome.

How to Make Jungle and Mushroom Biomes the Hardmode Way

You can totally use the above methods to create your biomes earlier than Hardmode, but if you're well into a world and want to do it in an easier way, there is an option.

The Steampunker NPC can move into one of your houses once you've defeated a mechanical boss and sells a nifty tool called the Clentaminator for a mere 2 Silver.

The Clentaminator allows you to convert biomes into select other biomes using solutions she sells. Though some solutions allow you to spread or remove Corruption, Crimson, or Hallow; two particular ones allow you to change Jungle biomes into Glowing Mushroom or Glowing Mushroom biomes into Jungle.

If you have either a Jungle or Glowing Mushroom biome you want to do other things with, the Clentaminator will allow you to completely change that biome into the other. Snazzy, right!

The Green Solution, which converts Glowing Mushroom biomes into Jungle biomes, can be purchased from the Steampunker for 25 Silver when she is in a Forest.

The Dark Blue Solution, which converts Jungle biomes into Glowing Mushroom biomes, can be bought from Truffle for 25 Silver. This requires you have had to made an above ground Glowing Mushroom biome already.

With Clentaminator and solutions in-hand, you can easily bounce between Jungle and Glowing Mushroom biomes, should you want to. It converts a huge area at a time, making it a quick option for those well-into a world.

---

Hopefully, this guide helps you on your way, and it's not the only one. You may find these two pretty useful:

But of course, we have plenty of other Terraria guides as well!

]]>
How to Install Texture Packs in Terraria 1.4 Journey's End https://www.gameskinny.com/tdr32/how-to-install-texture-packs-in-terraria-14-journeys-end https://www.gameskinny.com/tdr32/how-to-install-texture-packs-in-terraria-14-journeys-end Tue, 19 May 2020 13:14:43 -0400 Jason Coles

Terraria is great, and it looks incredible for the most part, but sometimes you want to change things up. Sometimes, you want to install Terraria texture packs to make Journey's End look even better. Here's how to do it. 

As of this latest update, Terraria now officially supports texture packs, which means it's easier than ever to play around in a world that looks however you want it to. So, it's a great time to spice up the look of Terraria, and here's how. 

How to Find Texture Packs for Terraria 1.4

Finding packs is easy, all you need to do is head over to the forum dedicated to texture packs. Then, you can either go into the Released or Works-in-Progress sections.

Released packs are complete and will work perfectly, while Works-in-Progress might not. Choose the pack you want and download it and you can begin the install. 

How to Install Texture Packs in Terraria 1.4

Installing the texture packs is easy too. First of all, you just need to drop the .zip file into the right folder. Here are the paths to follow for PC, Mac, and Linux: 

  • Windows: Documents\My Games\Terraria\ResourcePacks
  • Mac: ~Library/Application Support/Terraria/ResourcePacks
  • Linux: $XDG_DATA_HOME/Terraria/ResourcePacks

Once that's done, you need to open up Terraria, choose the Texture Packs option from the main menu, and then activate the texture pack you want. 

You can activate them and deactivate them from here, so you can swap between them to get a feel for your favorite ones or see what happens when you use loads of them at once. We don't recommend that though. 

That's everything you need to know about how to install texture packs in Terraria 1.4. Be sure to check out our other Terraria guides

]]>
How to Get the Terraprisma in Terraria 1.4 https://www.gameskinny.com/59ip2/how-to-get-the-terraprisma-in-terraria-14 https://www.gameskinny.com/59ip2/how-to-get-the-terraprisma-in-terraria-14 Mon, 18 May 2020 14:51:42 -0400 Jason Coles

While there are plenty of new things to find in the Journey's End update for Terraria, new enemies to defeat, and new powers to wield, few of them are as impressive as the Terraprisma. "What on earth is that?" I hear you crying from beyond the internet. 

It's one of the thousand-plus new items introduced in Terraria 1.4, the last update for Terraria, and its power is incredible. With that in mind, you'll be wanting to get your hands on it if you're hoping to be at your best for the challenges ahead of you. So, here's everything you need to know about the Terraprisma. 

How to Get the Terraprisma in Terraria 1.4

What is the Terraprisma

The Terraprisma is a fancy-looking new "sword" available in hardmode. While it looks like a sword, though, it's actually the best summon weapon in the game, which means it should be at the top of your wishlist. 

Using it costs 10 mana, and summons an enchanted sword to fight alongside you, somewhat like a familiar.

How to Get the Terraprisma 

To get the Terraprisma, you need to defeat the Empress of Light. This is a new boss introduced in the 1.4 Journey's End update, and they feel a lot like a bullet hell boss, to be honest.  

The Empress of Light flies around the world shooting out beams of varying colors that either home in on you or appear in specific areas, and dodging all of them is incredibly tough. She drops a lot of new loot, but to get the Terraprisma, you actually have to defeat her by only dealing damage during the day

This makes an already tough boss fight much harder because daylight boosts her damage high enough to instakill with nearly every attack.

However, doing this is the only way you can get the Terraprisma, so you'll either have to get very good at the game, or play on Journey Mode and activate God Mode instead. Both are equally honorable if you ask me. 

How to Spawn the Empress of Light

To spawn the Empress of Light, you first need to be in hardmode, which you reach when you've killed off the Wall of Flesh down at the bottom of the world. 

Now that you've done that, hallowed areas will appear, and you need to kill off Plantera, then head to one of the hallowed areas and keep an eye out for a little bug called a Prismatic Lacewing. These insects only spawn at night, and you'll need to kill it to summon the Empress of Light. 

The trick to getting the Terraprisma is to kill the Prismatic Lacewing just before night ends, and then make sure you keep moving as you're fighting off the Empress. 

If you don't deal damage to her only during the day, then the Terraprisma won't drop. It's not an easy thing to do, but the power of magical blades following you around is well worth it. Plus, you'll get to feel a little bit like Alucard in the Castlevania series, and that's gotta be worth the effort. 

That's it on how to get the Terraprisma in Terraria 1.4, as well as a few tips on how to beat the Empress of Light. Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more on the latest Terraria update, and be sure to keep an eye on our other Terraria guides!

]]>
Population Zero Guide: Locations for Essential Resources https://www.gameskinny.com/8g3ob/population-zero-guide-locations-for-essential-resources https://www.gameskinny.com/8g3ob/population-zero-guide-locations-for-essential-resources Fri, 15 May 2020 17:41:37 -0400 Sergey_3847

To craft items in Population Zero, you'll have to unlock technologies in the tech tree. But once those technologies become available, you'll need to obtain essential resources to actually craft items. 

Below, you will find a list of resources and their exact locations on the map. We provide you with tips and tricks on how to handle certain extreme areas while farming for the given resources. Hopefully, this guide will save you a lot of time and effort. 

Population Zero Guide: Locations for Essential Resources

Resource: Bractus
  • Sector: F16

To craft your first piece of armor, you will need resin from the Bractus plant, which grows on small islands in the swamps of sector F16.

Use a simple stone knife to harvest the plants. Bractus allows you to craft thin and thick leather.

Resource: Salt
  • Sector: P19

In the deserted area, you will find many salt pillars that can be broken down with a simple pickaxe. Sector P19 has the highest concentration of salt in the game.

This area is extremely hot, so if you start losing health, duck into the shadows of the big rocks or stand in the water to cool down.

Resource: Metal
  • Sector: M17

The best way to get metal is to collect the hull fragments, which can be turned into metal at the crafting station.

The largest deposit of hull fragments is located in sector M17, where you'll find the wreckage of a spaceship. 

Resource: Merid Carapace
  • Sector: Desert

When you enter the northern part of the map  a desert biome  you will notice little Merid monsters slinking under the shallow layer of sand.

You can easily beat them using a Bone Axe or a Bone Sword. They will drop the Merid Carapace resource.

Resource: Thorium
  • Sector: M19

Thorium is a blue stone, which can be mined as a part of a quest given by Radov at the hub.

Go to sector M19 for the largest deposit of Thorium stones, and use the pickaxe to break them apart.

Resource: Green Moss
  • Sector: G4

Green moss grows on the skeleton of a giant creature located in the swamp biome. This area is toxic, so bring along a gas mask and some detox food for survival.

Resource: Limestone
  • Sector: G12

The area with limestone deposits is right between the cold and the warm biomes. You don't need a Thermal Suit to get limestone; simply harvest a little bit at a time and quickly get back to the warm side. Rinse and repeat.

Resource: Cryopod Battery
  • Sector: G8

This is a cold area, but the geyser can warm you up. You will see the remains of a space ship with cryopod batteries scattered all over the place near the geyser.

Follow the same strategy as before. Jump into the cold biome, snatch a few batteries, and go back to the geyser to warm up.

That's it on essential resources for crafting in Population Zero. For more, be sure to check out our other Population Zero guides.

]]>
Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp — How to Get Reissue Material https://www.gameskinny.com/3xbw3/animal-crossing-pocket-camp-how-to-get-reissue-material https://www.gameskinny.com/3xbw3/animal-crossing-pocket-camp-how-to-get-reissue-material Fri, 15 May 2020 00:24:38 -0400 Gabriel Moss

Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp has a ton of seasonal events. The only problem is, what happens if you miss one of them? And what happens if you can't get the special goodies that would have been rewarded to you had you shown up sooner? The answer to that problem is Reissue Material.

Reissue Material is rewarded to you when you complete specific tasks throughout Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp.

What can you craft with Reissue Material? You can craft items from sets like Rover, Wonderland, and more. This guide will give you all the details you need to know about it and how you can get it. 

How to Get Reissue Material in Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp

First of all, you'll generally only use Reissue Material when crafting items that appear in the stopwatch-shaped tab in your Crafting menu. Even then, you'll need to spend bells on top of spending Reissue Material to craft the seasonal item.

Getting the Reissue Material itself is the tricky part, however, as the method of obtaining it has proven to change a bit.

Reissue Material has been spotted as a reward in the following places:

  • As a challenge reward at Shovelstrike Quarry.
  • As a reward for playing Reissue Material maps in Blather's Treasure Trek.
  • Complete Happy Homeroom classes and craft items from previous events to earn Happy Homeroom (HH) medals.
  • In a $2.99 Reissue Starter Pack (which isn't currently offered as of this article's publication) that gives you 70 Leaf Tickets and 5 Reissue Material. In the past, this starter pack would cap at five purchases.

It's worth concluding that they really want you to savor these Reissue Materials, so be sure to spend them wisely!

And that's our guide on how to get Reissue Material in Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp. Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more Animal Crossing Pocket Camp guides to keep you company!

]]>
How to Connect an Xbox One Controller to Your PC https://www.gameskinny.com/v0xgo/how-to-connect-an-xbox-one-controller-to-your-pc https://www.gameskinny.com/v0xgo/how-to-connect-an-xbox-one-controller-to-your-pc Thu, 14 May 2020 15:12:18 -0400 Daniel Hollis

With many people diving into Call Of Duty: Warzone, the idea of playing with a controller becomes more and more enticing. It's actually very easy and simple to do and this step-by-step guide will have you covered for everything you could ever need to know about how to connect an Xbox One controller to your PC.

Not only is a controller suitable for Call of Duty: Warzone, but it can be used for a host of Steam, Origin, Epic Store, and other applicable games.

If you have a wired Xbox One or Xbox 360 controller, all you have to do is plug it into one of your rig's USB ports, and you should be good to go. For that reason, we're going to focus on wireless and Bluetooth. 

Here is what you'll need to get started:

  • An Xbox One wireless controller
  • A Micro-USB cable
  • An Xbox Wireless Adapter
    • For wireless use only if the controller doesn't support Bluetooth or if you don't have Bluetooth on your PC

How to Connect an Xbox One Controller to Your PC

1. Connecting the Controller with Micro-USB

Connecting the controller with Micro-USB is a fairly simple process, and you can be well on your way within a couple of seconds. All you need to do is connect the controller to the PC with the Micro-USB cable it's as easy as that.

On Windows 10, you're able to have up to eight controllers supported at once. It's also worth noting that on Windows 7/Windows 8, you are only able to connect up to four controllers, with no headset support.

2. Connecting the Controller via Bluetooth

Some of the Xbox One controllers already have the capability to connect wirelessly as they contain built-in Bluetooth. It's easy to identify which controller does from a quick observation.

Is the part of the controller surrounding the Xbox symbol made of plastic or blended in with the rest of the controller? If the plastic wraps around the Xbox symbol, then you have a Bluetooth controller.

Image credit: Microsoft

If the controller is Bluetooth enabled, then:

  • Go to "Settings" on your PC
  • Click "Devices"
  • Go to "Bluetooth Settings"
  • Ensure Bluetooth is turned to "On." 
  • Power on the controller 
  • Press the sync button on top of the controller next to the Micro-USB slot 
  • Click "Add Bluetooth" or "Other device"
  • Click "Bluetooth" 

Your PC will begin searching for pairable devices until it finds the Xbox One controller. Once it does, click Xbox One wireless controller and then your controller is paired to the PC.

It's worth noting that with a Bluetooth connection, you need to be running the latest Windows update. It's also worth noting that the controller won't support any attachments such as headsets or chat pads.

3. Using a Wireless Adapter

If your controller isn't Bluetooth enabled, then you're going to have to follow this method.

First of all, you're going to need the official Xbox Wireless Adapter, which can be purchased here.

Image credit: Microsoft

In a few easy steps, you will be able to use the controller wirelessly. First, insert the USB dongle into your PC. Then turn on your controller with the guide button (Xbox symbol), and press the sync button, which rests on top of the controller next to the Micro-USB slot.

Once this is done, simply press the sync button on top of the USB dongle and the two should pair, enabling you to use your controller wirelessly. That's it!

---

The Xbox One controller is much simpler to pair with your PC than the DualShock 4, embracing much more of a plug-in-and-play approach.

Once connected, you'll be able to use your controller for a variety of games on numerous clients. It's worth noting that you should check that any game you're playing is controller compatible before running out to purchase one, as not every game is.

But if it is, it couldn't be simpler to connect an Xbox One controller to your PC. Be sure to check GameSkinny for other guides of similar nature, and if you're looking at how to connect a PS4 controller to your computer, we've got a guide for that.

]]>
Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp — How to Change Hair Color https://www.gameskinny.com/wynxp/animal-crossing-pocket-camp-how-to-change-hair-color https://www.gameskinny.com/wynxp/animal-crossing-pocket-camp-how-to-change-hair-color Thu, 14 May 2020 12:44:24 -0400 Gabriel Moss

In Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp, you have the ability to change your avatar's appearance at virtually any time. You can change your eyes, your skin color, and yes, even your hair color and style by accessing a special menu.

In this short guide, we go over how to access that menu and how to change your hair color on the fly. 

How to Change Hair Color in Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp

The first thing you'll want to do when you load into Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp is to get the tutorial finished and progress to the point where you're asked to download the complete Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp game via update.

After you've bypassed this point, the rest is easy!

Looking at the main interface, which appears whenever you're walking around in the world, you'll see a button on the bottom right of your screen that contains four little "windows" inside of it.

Tap on that button. On the next page, tap "Settings."

On the following page, tap "Edit Character." Next, tap on the button marked with a palette icon (on the right) and scroll down to see a range of available hair colors. Choose the one you want and tap "Proceed" when you're ready to get back out into the world!

The TL;DR is: 

  • Tap the button with four squares in the bottom right of the screen
  • Tap Edit Character
  • Tap the palette icon (on the right)
  • Choose your hair color and hairstyle
  • Tap "Proceed" to confirm

---

And that's it! Changing your hair color in Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp is really that easy! Stay tuned for more Pocket Camp guides right here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Is Stranded Deep Co-Op on PC, PS4, and Xbox One? https://www.gameskinny.com/rq3pn/is-stranded-deep-co-op-on-pc-ps4-and-xbox-one https://www.gameskinny.com/rq3pn/is-stranded-deep-co-op-on-pc-ps4-and-xbox-one Wed, 13 May 2020 18:53:40 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Is Stranded Deep co-op on PC, PS4, and Xbox One? Well, yes and no. The short answer is that the PC version of the survival game features local, split-screen multiplayer. The PS4 and Xbox One versions of the game do not feature multiplayer of any sort, so you can't yet play with a friend. 

Currently, there is no word on when or if the console versions of Stranded Deep will receive co-op functionality, though it's certainly possible in future updates. It wasn't well into the game's life — some three years — that multiplayer was added into the PC version in late 2018. 

If you're wondering how to play with a friend on PC, then the rest of this guide will show you how to do that. It's super easy if a little bit unclear. 

How to Play Split-Screen Multiplayer Co-Op in Stranded Deep on PC

Set up your controller in the Stranded Deep menu before starting co-op.

First, you'll need to connect a controller to your PC. You can do this before or after the game is running, it doesn't matter.

Now go to Options -> Input -> Controllers. You should see two options, as noted in the screenshot above: "Keyboard and Mouse" and "Xinput Gamepad 1."

Your keyboard and mouse should have "P1" on the far right side of the screen. Right now, the gamepad option underneath it will say "None." Click "None," and it will change to "P2."

Now you're ready to start. To access split-screen, multiplayer co-op on PC: 

  • Start a new game
  • Click "Singleplayer" to the right of "Mode"
    • This will change to "Cooperative"
    • Another avatar will appear on the screen

The image at the top of this guide is what your screen should look like once you've switched over to multiplayer. 

It's worth noting that you can also use Steam's Remote Play Together function to play with your friends. You can play on different devices, but it is still splits-screen. 

That's all you need to know about Stranded Deep split-screen, multiplayer co-op. Though you can play the game remotely, it's currently built for local multiplayer with friends on PC. For more on the deep-sea survival game, be sure to check out our other Stranded Deep guides here or above. 

]]>
How to Get Leather in Stranded Deep https://www.gameskinny.com/yxtph/how-to-get-leather-in-stranded-deep https://www.gameskinny.com/yxtph/how-to-get-leather-in-stranded-deep Wed, 13 May 2020 16:04:51 -0400 Sergey_3847

Leather may only be used for seven items in Stranded Deep, but it is an important crafting item nonetheless. You'll certainly be in need of the Refined Axe the further you get into the survival game, and the Speargun is essential for deep-sea defense. Even the Waterskin is important for long adventures.

Leather can be crafted from two materials, which can be hard to get in the beginning. However, follow all the steps below, and we'll show you just how to get leather. 

How to Get Leather in Stranded Deep

Before crafting leather, you need to obtain rawhide, which can be skinned off of boars and sharks. You can find tips on how to kill sharks in this guide.

After you get a piece of rawhide, you need to craft a tanning rack. Here's the crafting recipe:

  • 4x Lashing
  • 4x Wood Stick

You can get Lashing by following this guide, and Wood Sticks can be picked up on the ground or from trees by cutting them down. And no, palm trees do not grow back, so harvest them wisely. 

After crafting the tanning rack, follow these steps to craft leather:

  1. Open the Crafting menu
  2. Select the "Tools" tab
  3. Select the "Leather" option
Crafting Recipes Using Leather

Finally, after crafting your first piece of leather you can use it for crafting the following items:

Accessory
Recipe
Refined Axe
1x Leather
1x Stone Tool
1x Crude Axe
Refined Pick
2x Leather
2x Stone Tool
1x Stick
Refined Spear
1x Leather
1x Stone Tool
1x Crude Spear
Sleeping Bag
3x Stick
3x Leather
3x Cloth
Speargun 1x Leather
1x Duct Tape
2x Stick
1x Air Tank
Water Skin
1x Stick
2x Leather
1x Tanning Rack
Tool Belt Pouch 3
2x Leather

 

That's it on how to get leather in Stranded Deep. For more tips and tricks, be sure to check out some of our other guides for the game.

Check out our growing collection of Stranded Deep guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Slime Rancher: How to Get the Deluxe Chicken Coop https://www.gameskinny.com/t00kk/slime-rancher-how-to-get-the-deluxe-chicken-coop https://www.gameskinny.com/t00kk/slime-rancher-how-to-get-the-deluxe-chicken-coop Wed, 13 May 2020 15:04:26 -0400 Ashley Shankle

Keeping carnivorous slimes is a more involved task than just keeping herbivorous ones in Slime Rancher, whether you're going out and picking up hens on your own or have got a chicken coop set up on Far, Far Range.

I personally like to keep chickens using two different methods:

  1. Tossing a ton of them in the Overgrowth and letting them do their thing.
  2. Keeping chickens in coops in key areas (and away from pens full of carnivorous slimes) for easy access.

You'll probably be most comfortable keeping your chickens in a coop, which costs a mere 250 Newbucks to build and a mere 1,275 total to get up and running efficiently between its three basic upgrades.

There is a fourth chicken coop upgrade that will grant a huge boost to your chicken production and make taking care of them easier overall: the Deluxe Upgrade.

The Deluxe Coop allows for double the chickens in a coop. Not only that, but it sucks up elder chickens to keep your chicken production moving. Very handy!

How to Unlock the Deluxe Coop Upgrade

The Deluxe Upgrade for the chicken coop isn't available until you unlock the Mochi's Manor ranch expansion, and then begin trading.

How to Unlock Mochi's Manor

Mochi's Manor can only be unlocked once you:

  1. Open one of the two Slime Gates highlighted in the image below this list.
  2. Unlock the Grotto ranch expansion.
  3. Trade with Mochi via the Range Exchange, after doing the above.
How to Get the Upgrade

Once you've done all of the above and Mochi's ready to partner up with you for big Newbucks, it's time to get to work at Nimble Valley. Nimble Valley should open up when Mochi's Manor is open.

You have to trade Mochi a total of 600 Quicksilver Plorts to unlock the Deluxe Coop upgrade, at her personal Range Exchange at Mochi's Manor.

Quicksilver Plorts are collected at Nimble Valley, and you'll have limited time to collect them each time you head inside. Nimble Valley works differently from the rest of Far, Far Range and you cannot suck up Quicksilver Slimes to take back to the ranch.

Once you unlock the Deluxe Coop, you'll be able to upgrade your chicken coops to the new and improved version for a small 650 Newbucks.

---

Check out our other Slime Rancher guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
How to Recover a Deleted Minecraft World https://www.gameskinny.com/r1g9p/how-to-recover-a-deleted-minecraft-world https://www.gameskinny.com/r1g9p/how-to-recover-a-deleted-minecraft-world Wed, 13 May 2020 13:48:41 -0400 Sergey_3847

Losing a Minecraft world that you spent hours upon hours building in and exploring is a great loss. Often, deleting a Minecraft world happens by accident, and unfortunately, Minecraft deletes the files from your hard drive, bypassing the Recycle Bin. This guide will show you how to recover a deleted Minecraft world.

This method only works on PC. If you're playing any other version of Minecraft, then there is a good chance that your world is irrevocably lost. 

How to Recover a Deleted Minecraft World

Minecraft saves all worlds in separate folders in a hidden place on your hard drive. To find the hidden and folder and your Minecraft files:

  1. Press the "Win+R" key combination
  2. Type "%appdata%" in the search line
  3. Press Enter to open the AppData folder
  4. Go to "\roaming\.minecraft\saves"

Now you should be inside the hidden folder, where Minecraft saves all of your worlds inside other separate folders with the given names of the worlds.

In order to restore your deleted Minecraft worlds, follow these steps:

  1. Press the right mouse button (RMB) on an empty area of the folder
  2. Click on Properties
  3. Select "Previous Versions" tab

You should see the list of deleted Minecraft world folders. Choose a folder from the list and click on the Restore option. This will recover the deleted folder.

Now you can go back to Minecraft, and you will find your deleted world back in the game's menu.

That's it on how to recover a deleted Minecraft world. For more, check out our huge selection Minecraft guides.

]]>
How to Use a Controller in Call Of Duty Warzone on PC https://www.gameskinny.com/lmlin/how-to-use-a-controller-in-call-of-duty-warzone-on-pc https://www.gameskinny.com/lmlin/how-to-use-a-controller-in-call-of-duty-warzone-on-pc Tue, 12 May 2020 17:16:37 -0400 Daniel Hollis

While playing on a PC may give you the best graphical advantage in Call of Duty Warzone, there's no denying the comfort and accessibility of being able to use a controller for the optimum experience. So if you're wondering how to use a controller in Call of Duty Warzone, you've come to the right place. 

Call of Duty Warzone supports cross-play and while many console players might believe having a PC is an advantage, sometimes a controller can give you the upper hand on mouse and keyboard. With Call of Duty Warzone, you can link a controller to use in battle, and though it's easy, it's not always exactly clear how to do so.

Having the simple satisfaction of an Xbox One controller or even a Dualshock 4 can mean the difference between life and death, dependent on which one you feel more comfortable with. That's not to mention that certain controller attachments are just as good, if not better, for some players as the most advanced mouse and keyboard combo. 

How to Use a Controller in Call Of Duty Warzone on PC

So, how do you do it? It's actually a fairly simple process and all it requires is a few basic steps.

  • First of all, simply connect the controller of your choice to your PC.
  • Load up Call of Duty Warzone via your mouse and keyboard.
  • Once in-game, go into the in-game options menu.
  • Select the "general" tab.
  • Here you can switch your input device. Select the controller option.
  • You are now able to play Call of Duty Warzone via your controller.

As with any new controller setup, you may need to adjust your sensitivity and aiming controls to make it as comfortable as possible, but you're now well on your way to being able to use your controller on a PC for Call of Duty Warzone.

If you don't know how to connect a DualShock 4 to your PC, we've got you covered here. You can check this article for how to connect an Xbox One controller to PC.

In the meantime, Windows 10 is optimized to recognize Xbox controllers. If you have a wired option, simply plug it into a USB port on your PC, and you should be good to go. If you have a wireless Xbox One controller, you'll need a separate USB dongle, which you can get for relatively cheap. 

For a Bluetooth setup, you'll need Bluetooth on your PC. If you don't have Bluetooth built into your PC, you can by adapters ad various prices. 

---

That's it for our guide on how to use a controller in Call of Duty Warzone on PC, but that's not it for our content on the game.

Keep your eyes on GameSkinny for more Call of Duty: Warzone guides.

]]>
How to Level Up & Unlock PvP in Population Zero https://www.gameskinny.com/aisz6/how-to-level-up-unlock-pvp-in-population-zero https://www.gameskinny.com/aisz6/how-to-level-up-unlock-pvp-in-population-zero Tue, 12 May 2020 13:23:41 -0400 Sergey_3847

Many players have been complaining about Population Zero's XP and leveling system and the hurdles they face getting into the game's PvP server, which unlocks at Character Level 2. "How do you level up in Population Zero" has been a big topic in the game's Steam forums since its release into Early Access. 

It doesn't help that the game's 7-day progression cycle is a tad bit nebulous, with players not being able to see XP gains until the make a full rotation or give up and kill themselves. In short, XP collects during a single playthrough or set of missions and carries to subsequent playthroughs. 

This guide will show you how to level up your character in Population Zero, so you can start playing the PvP mode now instead of later. 

How to Level Up in Population Zero

Step 1: Complete Missions

Aside from giving you a few random, temporary perks, Population Zero doesn't reward players for free-roaming. No XP is gained by free-roaming, so it's important to follow the directions given by NPCs at the game's hub for missions and side-missions. 

If you wish to level up and get to Character Level 2 faster, then you need to complete at least the first two missions given by the NPC named Radov. Afterward, PvP mode will be accessible. 

Radov can be found at the game's hub above the ground floor of the station. He will ask you to bring some samples of the Void scattered around the world, as well as collect some materials.

If you do these two missions, you will get your first 400 XP points, which is enough to level up your character to Level 2.

Step 2: Give Up Your Session

The game ends your session every seven days and wipes out all your progress. However, your XP is preserved, which means that if you have earned 400 XP (which you certainly have if you've played for seven days), you will unlock the PvP mode after the reset.

Unfortunately, the reset doesn't take place until seven real-life days pass. So in order to get to PvP mode faster (or simply see your XP gains grow as you would in any other RPG or MMO), you need to give up your session in the game's menu.

Here's how to do it:

  1. Start the game
  2. Open the game's menu
  3. Select "Give up!" option
  4. Confirm the end of the session

Once you've given up your session, your character will automatically level up and the PvP mode will be unlocked as soon as you start a new gaming session.

That's it on how to how to level up in Population Zero. Like almost any other RPG or MMO, you level up by completing missions and going on quests. The only difference is you won't see your XP gains until the game makes a full cycle or you give up. For more, be sure to check out our other Population Zero guides.

]]>
Animal Crossing: New Horizons: How to Find and Use Bell Vouchers https://www.gameskinny.com/purs3/animal-crossing-new-horizons-how-to-find-and-use-bell-vouchers https://www.gameskinny.com/purs3/animal-crossing-new-horizons-how-to-find-and-use-bell-vouchers Tue, 12 May 2020 12:03:19 -0400 Gabriel Moss

Animal Crossing: New Horizons gives you plenty of options with which to produce bells (the regional currency of the Animal Crossing universe) and eventually usurp that jerk Tom Nook.

Just kidding, of course: Tom Nook will own your little island for the rest of eternity.

But that doesn't mean you have to live and die a pauper! Here's our guide on how to find and use Bell Vouchers, a useful tool for quickly accumulating bells — if you have the Nook Miles to spare, of course.

How to Find and Use Bell Vouchers in Animal Crossing: New Horizons

First of all, you might be wondering what Bell Vouchers even are in Animal Crossing: New Horizons. These are vouchers that you can purchase from the Nook Stop (the ATM-like vending machine in the shop) by spending Nook Miles.

Once you have a Bell Voucher, you can redeem it for bells. There is one little problem, however. Before you can even start picking these Bell Vouchers up, you need to reach a certain point in the development of your town.

Upgrading Residential Services

Here's what you need to have accomplished in Animal Crossing: New Horizons before you can even start buying Bell Vouchers from the Nook Stop:

  • Spend 5,000 Nook Miles or 48,000 bells to pay off your Deserted Island Getaway Package.
  • Spend 98,000 bells to upgrade your tent into an actual House.
  • Give Timmy 30 Wood, 30 Hardwood, 30 Softwood, and 30 Iron Nuggets to build the Nook's Cranny shop.
  • Build a bridge to open more space for more villagers.
  • Designate three more housing plots for three more villagers, at a rate of one new villager per real-world day.
  • Wait for Tom Nook to announce the Upgraded Resident Services building, then wait a real-world day for it to be completed.

After you've accomplished these necessary steps, you can buy Bell Vouchers from the Nook Stop for 500 Nook Miles a pop.

When you've acquired some Bell Vouchers in Animal Crossing: New Horizons, speak to Timmy or Tommy to redeem your aforementioned Bell Vouchers for 3,000 bells each.

You can find the two characters in the Nook's Cranny shop between 8 a.m. and 10 p.m.

---

And that's our guide on finding and using Bell Vouchers in Animal Crossing: New Horizons. If you found this guide useful, take a gander at our steadily growing list of New Horizons guides

]]>
Population Zero: How to Find Blue Essence https://www.gameskinny.com/d39ms/population-zero-how-to-find-blue-essence https://www.gameskinny.com/d39ms/population-zero-how-to-find-blue-essence Tue, 12 May 2020 11:10:56 -0400 Sergey_3847

Some of the materials in Population Zero are more obscure than others. However, it would be hard to survive without those rare materials. One of them is the elusive Blue Essence, which can be used in several important ways. This guide will show you how to find Blue Essence in Population Zero.

Blue Essence is mainly used for crafting Concentrated Blue Essence, which is used in several types of equipment. Follow our instructions below if you want to collect the Blue Essence material.

How to Find Blue Essence in Population Zero

Blue Essence appears on large roots, which can be found in the cold biomes of sectors E10 and E12. These roots are very rare and hard to find, but if you go to these locations, you should be able to extract a lot of Blue Essence.

These large roots usually grow on cliffsides and hills. Though some roots are on the ground, making for easy extraction, some are high up on cliffsides and hills, making them very difficult to reach. 

Luckily, you don't need any special equipment to collect Blue Essence. Just walk up to the roots and press the "E" key to interact, and the Essence will go straight into your inventory.

However, since the biomes in which Blue Essense is found are very cold, it is recommended to equip a Thermal Suit before venturing out. Without the suit, your character can die very quickly.

You can also use Warming Stew as a source of food, which will not only satiate your hunger but also prevent you from freezing. When you have both the suit and the stew, you are ready to collect the Blue Essence.

---

That's it on how to find Blue Essence in Population Zero. For more, be sure to check out our other Population Zero guides.

]]>
Slime Rancher: Dervish Plort Statues Locations https://www.gameskinny.com/l6jup/slime-rancher-dervish-plort-statues-locations https://www.gameskinny.com/l6jup/slime-rancher-dervish-plort-statues-locations Mon, 11 May 2020 18:35:53 -0400 Ashley Shankle

There are only three Dervish Statues for you to find in Slime Rancher's Glass Desert. Despite their small number, finding all three can be frustrating. You'll want to get the Dervish Fountain restored if you want to start farming their plorts, which means you've got to find the area's Dervish Statues.

Below, I'll show you exactly where to find them so you don't have to. 

Slime Rancher Dervish Fountain Location

To get started, you'll have to find the Dervish Fountain found in the Glass Desert. The location of the fountain is marked with a red circle in the partial image of the Glass Desert below.

In this area are three Dervish Plot Statues, each one in a different spot within the area and at a different altitude (to really shake things up). You'll have to keep your eyes peeled for them, as they're not particularly large either.

Luckily, your journey thus far has been a handful already, so you're well-prepared to take on this task with the help of your trusty jetpack.

Dervish Plort Statue Locations

You can seek these out in any order.

Dervish Plort Statue One

Entering the fountain from the east, you should be able to look up at the top of its northwest corner and see the first Dervish Plort Statue on the ledge. Find your way up and around the wall to be able to use your jetpack to reach it.

Dervish Plort Statue Two

The next statue is in a hole just outside of the fountain, just check the location of the red dot in the image above.

Dervish Plort Statue Three

This one can be found on the wall on the far side of the area from the fountain. It's a quick jetpack from the fountain to the wall where you can find this statue.

And with that, you'll see an increase in Dervish Slimes and can start your Dervish Plort empire! Or just enjoy the slimes' company, they are pretty darling. Check out our other Slime Rancher guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Animal Crossing New Horizons: Scorpion Catching Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/o3q9o/animal-crossing-new-horizons-scorpion-catching-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/o3q9o/animal-crossing-new-horizons-scorpion-catching-guide Mon, 11 May 2020 14:43:17 -0400 Ashley Shankle

Animal Crossing: New Horizons northern hemisphere players will notice tarantulas are now out of season, and here to replace them are scorpions. If you thought tarantulas were a pain to catch, you've got another thing coming when trying to catch scorpions.

Scorpions will be spawning in New Horizons from May all the way to October, but this is an insect you shouldn't wait on as they sell for 8,000 bells each! You'll want to catch scorpions whenever you can to line your pockets.

There are two methods for catching scorpions, and there's a strategy to farm them. First we'll go into the two ways you can catch scorpions without breaking a sweat, then we'll go into how you can set yourself up for farming success.

Animal Crossing New Horizons: Scorpion Catching Guide

When Can You Catch Scorpions?

As stated, scorpions will be showing up on your island and elsewhere from May to October in the northern hemisphere.

If you're in the southern hemisphere, scorpions will be available from November to April.

They come out from 7 p.m. to 4 a.m., so stay sharp!

How to Catch Scorpions in Animal Crossing: New Horizons

Tarantulas at least gave a warning when they were about to strike (jumping before dashing), making them relatively easy to catch. Scorpions don't give you that benefit.

Since scorpions will run at you without jumping first, you have to take things a little more slowly. You'll notice that when you get near a scorpion, it rears up and prepares to strike. That's the last sign before they make a run for you.

Scorpion Catching Method One

This is the most basic method, and the one I use because I'm lazy. This also works on tarantulas.

All you have to do for this method is creep towards the scorpion while holding the "A" button. 

  1. Hold "A" and creep towards the scorpion.
  2. Move towards it, still holding "A," until it goes into defensive mode.
  3. Stand still until it relaxes, still holding the "A" button.
  4. Move a bit more toward it until rears up again, still holding "A."
  5. Stand still until it relaxes, still holding the "A" button.
  6. Keep doing this until you're just close enough to swing your net down onto the scorpion!

This doesn't take much time, and you should be able to catch the scorpion with the edge of your net.

If you're scared of scorpions or aren't confident in your ability to do the above, consider the following method instead.

Scorpion Catching Method Two

This one actually ties into the scorpion farming method outlined below, but you can use it on your island as well.

This method relies on the fact that you can jump, but scorpions cannot.

Let's lay this one out step by step, too.

  1. See scorpion.
  2. Dig three holes in a row, either horizontally or vertically depending on your position from the scorpion.
  3. Walk up to the scorpion and provoke it to chase you.
  4. Run to the holes and hop over one.
  5. Swing your net and catch the scorpion.

This method is more time consuming and isn't an option if you run into one in some decorated areas. I highly recommend mastering the first method, but this way is great if you're just darned scared of these skittering menaces.

How to Farm Scorpions in New Horizons

This requires some luck, perhaps several Nook Miles Tickets, perseverance, and planning.

Scorpions spawn most frequently in flat areas, and there is one Nook Miles island that is perfect for farming these mean clackers: bamboo islands.

The basic method is to visit a bamboo island, remove all its resources, dig a safety zone, and to bait scorpions towards it for safe catching.

The only tools you actually need on a bamboo island are:

  • Shovel
  • Bug nets
  • Axe (the regular kind to chop down trees, not the stone kind)

However, there's never any guarantee you'll get a bamboo island when traveling by Nook Miles Ticket, so you may want to have your regular array of tools.

You may want two shovels, and two nets.

Step 1. Remove Everything on the Bamboo Island

Anything you can dig up or remove from the ground, you're going to want to deal with.

This means:

  1. Chop down bamboo trees with the axe, then dig up the stumps
  2. Pick all the weeds and flowers
  3. Eat coconuts found on the beaches and smash the island's rocks

What this does is makes it so other types of bugs can't spawn, except wharf roaches. You'll have to chase wharf roaches off.

Just dump anything you don't want in your inventory for this task on the beach.

Step 2. Create your Parameter

Stand in one spot, anywhere on the island, and dig out holes all around you in a square.

This is your safe zone, and is going to be where you bait scorpions into chasing you.

You can hop over the holes with ease — this is your key to success!

Step 3. Start Provoking and Catching Scorpions

It's finally time to start!

How this works is you walk or run around the island until you spot a scorpion, then make use of your safe zone. Here it is step by step:

  1. Walk around the island until you spot a scorpion.
  2. Walk up to it to get it to chase you.
  3. Run to your safe zone and hop over a hole to get into it.
  4. Catch the scorpion with your net from the safety of the other side.
  5. Rinse and repeat!

You may have to chase off wharf roaches from time to time to keep scorpions spawning, but using this method you can get an inventory full of scorpions in an hour or so and rain in those sweet, sweet bells.

---

And that's how you catch scorpions and farm scorpions in AC:NH. Check out our plethora of other Animal Crossing: New Horizons guides here on GameSkinny!

]]>
Do Palm Trees Grow Back in Stranded Deep? https://www.gameskinny.com/i3kcn/do-palm-trees-grow-back-in-stranded-deep https://www.gameskinny.com/i3kcn/do-palm-trees-grow-back-in-stranded-deep Mon, 11 May 2020 13:34:11 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Do palm trees grow back in Stranded Deep? The short answer is: no. Palm trees do not grow back or respawn in Stranded Deep. It doesn't matter if you're playing the survival game on PC, PS4, or Xbox One. 

Though some plants in the deep-sea survival game do grow back, most don't, including palm trees. The list of plants that don't respawn also includes the ficus tree and pine tree saplings. Any tree that provides you with wood sticks does not grow back. 

However, it is worth pointing out that the palm tree sapling does respawn. How long does it take palm tree saplings to grow back? About two in-game days. Keep in mind, though, that a palm tree sapling will never grow into a palm tree

Why Don't Palm Trees Grow Back in Stranded Deep? 

Stranded Deep is a survival game about exploration. The point is to eventually leave your small starting island and explore the ocean. You're meant to find what's hidden on the game's many other islands, as well as what's in its deep, dark depths. 

Palm trees don't grow back because if they did, you might not investigate the areas far from your initial island. It is one of the several mechanisms that forces you into exploration.

Perhaps you'd never find the megalodon or giant eel if you didn't take to the sea, and you'd never come across all of the vehicle parts to build the gyrocopter or powered raft if you stayed in one place forever. 

It's possible the developers might patch in palm tree respawning at some point, but considering how long the game has been in Early Access (since 2015) and gone without it, such an addition is highly unlikely. 

Since palm trees are gone forever once they're harvested, it's possible you'll want to carry as much wood as possible when you go out on scavenging runs. 

How to Transport More Wood Sticks Between Islands

Put wood sticks in a crate after chopping down palm trees.

Since you'll have to island-hop to chop down palm trees, it's worth making sure you have the inventory space to carry the maximum number of wood sticks at a single time.

Though you could devote all of your inventory slots to carrying wood sticks, it's most likely you'll bring along other tools, like the axe for chopping, the stone cutting tool for cutting down smaller plants, and perhaps a spear or speargun for defense. 

All things being equal, your nine-slot inventory will hold 36 sticks, though you couldn't carry anything else. Practically, you could only carry 27 sticks. However, if you take eight crates with you, you can carry 96 wood sticks and an axe in your inventory. Each crate can hold 12 wood sticks. 

It's highly doubtful you'll ever need to carry that many wood sticks at a single time, but it's worth making the most efficient use of your inventory space when exploring new islands. 

Lastly, if you have a big enough raft and enough room, you can also haul the palm tree trunks onto your raft and transport them to another island, bringing even more wood back to your base. 

---

That's all you need to know to answer the question: Do palm trees grown back in Stranded Deep. For more on Stranded Deep, be sure to check out our other guides while you're here, and stay tuned to GameSkinny for more on the survival game. You never know: maybe palm trees will respawn one day. 

Check out our growing collection of Stranded Deep guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
How to Link Call of Duty Mobile to Warzone https://www.gameskinny.com/7l4l2/how-to-link-call-of-duty-mobile-to-warzone https://www.gameskinny.com/7l4l2/how-to-link-call-of-duty-mobile-to-warzone Mon, 11 May 2020 12:29:47 -0400 Daniel Hollis

A little known tip many players don't know is that you can link Call of Duty Mobile to Call of Duty Warzone. By linking both games together, you are able to unlock special rewards in Call of Duty Mobile in the form of Warzone Coins.

It's quick, simple, and easy to do. Here's a rundown of how to link the two games and be well on your way to earning some rewards.

How to Link Call of Duty Mobile to Warzone

Steps to Link Call of Duty Mobile to Warzone

First, you will need to create a Call of Duty/Activision account if you haven't already done so. Once you create an account, or if you already have one, follow the steps below: 

  • Download both games 
  • Log into both games with the same Activision account
  • Once your account is associated with both games, complete the tutorial in Call of Duty Warzone 

The Warzone Coins should be delivered to your CoD Mobile inbox within three days. Wait for the next opportunity for the coins to be spent. They will be found in your mailbox, which can be found in the top options rail in Call of Duty Mobile, just to the left of the settings and friends icons. 

What is a Warzone Coin?

A Warzone Coin is a unique form of currency that is gathered by linking the two games together. Unfortunately, it's a timed promotion that has appeared twice so far since Call of Duty Warzone's launch. However, it's not a stretch to say there won't be more promotional periods in the future.

The coins so far have enabled players to purchase a special Task 141 Solider in Call of Duty Mobile. These characters are skins of classic Call of Duty Modern Warfare characters, most notably, Ghost, Captain Price, and Gaz.

---

It's pretty simple to link you Call of Duty Mobile account to Warzone, and doing so early negates any hassle when Warzone Coin promotions appear.

Check out some of our other content on Warzone:

Keep your eyes on GameSkinny for more Call of Duty: Warzone guides.

]]>
How to Fix Call of Duty Warzone Memory Error 13-71 https://www.gameskinny.com/6h734/how-to-fix-call-of-duty-warzone-memory-error-13-71 https://www.gameskinny.com/6h734/how-to-fix-call-of-duty-warzone-memory-error-13-71 Mon, 11 May 2020 11:36:26 -0400 Daniel Hollis

There's nothing better than settling down for an evening of Call of Duty Warzone with your friends to fight it out and be the last team standing. So nothing is more infuriating than being hit with Memory Error 13-71. The error essentially makes the game unplayable, preventing you from entering its online components and bricking the game. 

Multiple users have reported hitting this issue, all airing their frustrations on forums and comments sections as Activision hasn't yet managed to permanently identity and fix the issue.

Many say that the issue has to do with Regiments, which essentially are the game's version of clans. But don't fret: There are a few methods that can help you get passed the error and have you dropping back into the action in no time.

How to Fix Call Of Duty Warzone Memory Error

How to Fix Memory Error 13-71: Option 1

The above video from Gaming Gameplay details one of the ways in which you can potentially bypass the error, which includes using a second account. A simple outline of the method goes like so:

  • Create a new account with a different email address.
  • Load up Call of Duty Warzone while logged into this new account.
  • Proceed to the multiplayer menu (the error message shouldn't appear).
  • Once in, switch accounts on your console to the one you wish to play with.
  • Now, leave the regiment that you're associated with.

You should now be ready good to go. It's also worthwhile enabling the option to block regiment invites to be safe. Hopefully, this works, but if the issue is still affecting you, there are a few other methods that might work. 

How to Fix Memory Error 13-71: Option 2

This option is similar to the first one and ensures that you leave your regiment, albeit through different means.

  • Load up Call of Duty Warzone.
  • Proceed until you receive the error message.
  • Accept the error message.
  • Once accepted, the game will attempt to put you online
  • At this point, cancel it.
  • Two options appear: Retry or Go Offline. Press Go Offline.
  • Go to the account option and disable cross-play.
  • Boot up Call of Duty Warzone again.
  • When it asks you to enable cross-play, ignore it.
  • Go to the regiments tab.
  • Leave your regiment.
  • Disable invites again.
  • Now allow cross-play and Call of Duty Warzone should now be working.

If this still isn't working for you, there's one last option that isn't ideal, but some users have reported that it has rectified the issue.

How to Fix Memory Error 13-71: Option 3

This option is simply deleting the game off your system and redownloading the whole game again. It's a hefty task, with a file size larger than most games, but users have tried this as a last resort and reported that it's fixed the problem.

---

While it's not an immediate fix, it's always a good idea to report the issue to Activision in the hopes for a patch or fix within the coming weeks. The more reports they receive, the more likely they are to patch the issue faster. 

If this Call of Duty memory error has affected you or you've found another workaround, let us know in the comments below!

Keep your eyes on GameSkinny for more Call of Duty: Warzone guides.

]]>
Johto Throwback Pokemon Go Challenge Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/grhxe/johto-throwback-pokemon-go-challenge-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/grhxe/johto-throwback-pokemon-go-challenge-guide Fri, 08 May 2020 15:24:05 -0400 Joshua Broadwell

The Johto throwback Pokemon Go event is live now through May 15 at 1 p.m. local time. For the next week, Niantic's Pokemon mobile spinoff will let you partake in much Johto-themed goodness, including a Throwback Challenge giving you a shot at a rare Ho-Oh that knows Earthquake.

Here's everything you need to know about the Johto throwback Pokemon Go event.

Johto Throwback Pokemon Go Challenge Guide

Stardust, Encounters, and Dunsparce, Oh My!

It should come as no surprise, but Pokemon hailing from the Johto region (Pokemon Gen 2) will be more common for the event's duration. So look forward to finding more Skarmory, Gligar, Shuckle, and the like, and you'll get chances to battle Johto Pokemon in Raids as well (including remote Raids).

The following Pokemon will come from 7km Eggs during the Johto throwback event:

  • Chinchou
  • Yanma
  • Girafarig
  • Phanpy
  • Shuckle
  • Gligar
  • Dunsparce
  • Skarmory
  • Pineco

Speaking of Dunsparce, you may even get lucky and run into a Shiny Dunsparce in the wild (read: near your home).

Finally, you'll get twice the Stardust and twice the Raid Stardust while the event lasts, and there's an Umbreon hat for Pikachu.

Johto Throwback Pokemon Go Challenge

The other big draw for the Johto Throwback event is the Throwback Challenge tasks leading up to a Ho-Oh encounter. Completing each week's Timed Research tasks means you'll get a Genesect at the end of the last throwback event too.

As always, each of the nine steps is broken into three parts, and we've got them listed below.

Johto Throwback Step 1

  • Catch three Grass, Water, or Fire-type Pokemon
    • Reward: 10 Poke Balls
  • Send a gift to a friend
    • Reward: Encounter Dunsparce (could be Shiny)
  • Catch a Flying-type Pokemon
    • Reward: 500 Stardust

Completing Step 1 gets you 1 Silver Pinap Berry, 2 Golden Razz Berries, and an encounter with Xatu.

Johto Throwback Step 2

  • Play with your buddy (more on Buddy Pokemon)
    • Reward: Spinarak encounter
  • Give your buddy three treats
    • Reward: 5 Razz Berries
  • Catch a Bug-type Pokemon
    • Reward: 500 Stardust

Finishing Step 2 means you'll get 1 Golden Razz Berry, 2 Silver Pinap Berries, and a run-in with Pineco, which could be Shiny.

Johto Throwback Step 3

  • Make three Great Throws
    • Reward: 1 Charged TM
  • Hatch an Egg
    • Reward: Snubbull encounter
  • Catch a Normal-type Pokemon
    • Reward: 500 Stardust

At the end of all this, you'll net 2 Golden Razz Berries, 1 Silver Pinap Berry, and, if you catch it, a Miltank.

Johto Throwback Step 4

  • Evolve a Pokemon
    • Reward: Sudowoodo encounter
  • Catch 5 different species of Pokemon
    • Reward: 10 Great Balls
  • Catch a Ghost-type Pokemon
    • Reward: 500 Stardust

Finishing Step 4 drops 1 Golden Razz Berry and 2 Silver Pinap Berries into your lap, plus gives you a Misdreavous encounter.

Johto Throwback Step 5

  • Take 3 snapshots with your buddy
    • Reward: Shuckle encounter
  • Make 4 Nice curveball throws
    • Reward: Mantine encounter
  • Catch a Fighting-type Pokemon
    • Reward: 500 Stardust

Two more Golden Razz Berries and a Silver Pinap Berry will be yours upon finishing Step 5, along with the chance to encounter Hitmontop.

Johto Throwback Step 6

  • Catch an Electric-type Pokemon
    • Reward: 1 Incense
  • Power up Pokemon three times
    • Reward: Mareep encounter
  • Catch a Steel-type Pokemon
    • Reward: 500 Stardust

The big encounter for finishing Step 6 is with Skarmory, and you'll get 1 Golden Razz and 2 Silver Pinap Berries too.

Johto Throwback Step 7

  • Evolve a Pokemon
    • Reward: King's Rock
  • Catch a Water-type Pokemon
    • Reward: Gligar encounter
  • Catch an Ice-type Pokemon
    • Reward: 500 Stardust

Piloswine will lumber your way after finishing Step 7, and surprise(!), you get 1 Silver Pinap and 2 Golden Razz Berries.

Johto Throwback Step 8

  • Take a snapshot of an Ice-type Pokemon (like Piloswine)
    • Reward: 1 Dragon Scale
  • Battle another Trainer
    • Reward: 10 Ultra Balls
  • Power up a Pokemon six times
    • Reward: 500 Stardust

This time, you'll meet Donphan, along with the obligatory berries — 2 Silver Pinap and 1 Golden Razz this go around.

Johto Throwback Step 9

This isn't really a challenge. Making it this far rewards you with three sets of 3,000 XP and, more importantly, puts a Ho-Oh in your path. It could be Shiny, and it'll definitely know Earthquake.

Finishing the Johto Throwback Challenge in Pokemon Go also gets you five Rare Candies; it was originally advertised as 10, but the missing five will be available on the first page of next week's Hoenn Throwback Challenge.

Johto Throwback Timed Research

Aside from the Johto Throwback Challenge itself, you'll get access to a set of Timed Research Tasks that offer a chance at nabbing a unique Pokemon. Some of these could help meet your Throwback Challenge requirements as well:

Task Reward
  Catch 3 Fire-type Pokemon  Quilava encounter
  Catch 3 Normal-type Pokemon Dunspace encounter
  Earn a heart with your buddy  Bayleef encounter
  Hatch an Egg  Phanpy encounter
Make 3 curveball throws  Noctowl encounter
  Play with your buddy  Totodile encounter
  Trade a Pokemon  Aipom encounter
  Use 5 Berries to help catch Pokemon  Pineco encounter

 

Like the rest of the event, these last for the next week.

---

The Johto throwback Pokemon Go event is just part two of the five-week-long Pokemon Go throwback celebration. Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more Pokemon Go news and events as they unfold. Be sure to check out our Pokemon Go guides hub for more! 

]]>
Population Zero Weapons Early Access Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/o9vmp/population-zero-weapons-early-access-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/o9vmp/population-zero-weapons-early-access-guide Fri, 08 May 2020 13:37:58 -0400 Sergey_3847

Population Zero weapons are limited in the game's current build. Right now, for example, there are no ranged weapons in Early Access. However, there are five tiers of melee weapons in the survival MMO, which can be obtained by unlocking their corresponding technologies in the tech tree.

This weapons guide for Population Zero will provide you with a list of all available weapons in the game and how to get them.

Population Zero Weapons Guide for Early Access

Tier-0 Weapons
  • Stone Hammer
  • Stone Knife

At the very beginning of Population Zero, you can craft two of the simplest stone weapons in the game: the stone hammer and the stone knife.

These can be unlocked in the technology tree for one theory point each. You will also need to find a couple of stones on the ground before you can craft them.

Tier-1 Weapons
  • Bone Sword
  • Bone Axe
  • Bone Spear
  • Bone Hammer

Once you have a hammer or a knife at your disposal, you can start hunting Kvars in the area near hub. Kvars will drop bones, which can be used for crafting bone weapons, such as the Bone Sword, the Bone Axe, the Bone Spear, and the Bone Hammer.

Just like stone weapons, each bone weapon requires one theory point to unlock However, bone weapons are much more durable and deal with beasts much faster, so it's worth getting them as quickly as possible. 

Tier-2 Weapons
  • Metal Sword
  • Metal Axe
  • Metal Spear
  • Metal Hammer

The next tier of weapons is much stronger than bone weapons. But in order to craft metal weapons, you need to obtain metal hull fragments, which can be located in sectors G11 and D11 on the map.

Once you have some metal, you can unlock one of the metal weapons by spending three theory points.

Tier-3 Weapons
  • Xenofungus Sword
  • Xenofungus Axe
  • Xenofungus Spear
  • Xenofungus Hammer

The next tier of weapons will require you to use a workbench, which can be found on the top floor of the hub right behind Radov.

Before crafting xenofungus weapons, you must obtain xenofungus, which is a large blue mushroom. This species can be located in the southern part of the map in the snow region.

When you have obtained the xenofungus pieces, you need to temper them in the fireplace at the hub, and then unlock xenofungus weapons at the tech tree by paying 10 theory points.

Lastly, approach the workbench at the hub and craft one of the xenofungus weapons of your choice.

Tier-4 Weapons
  • Scyphopod Sword
  • Scyphopod Axe
  • Scyphopod Spear
  • Scyphopod Hammer

The last tier of weapons is currently the most powerful and durable type of weapons in Population Zero.

Scyphopod is an alien material, which can be obtained from scyphopod plants, an alien species that also grow in the snow region. Once you have the scyphopod plant, use it to craft new scyphopod weapons at the workbench.

In order to unlock the scyphopod technology you need to have at least six points in the Geodesy science branch and 25 theory points.

Then, you can take on the Scyphopod boss in the Hive region, which would is hard to beat with any other weapon.

---

That's all for Population Zero weapons, but be sure to come back soon for more related guides at the game's hub page.

]]>
Stranded Deep: How to Refuel Your Campfire https://www.gameskinny.com/mvttz/stranded-deep-how-to-refuel-your-campfire https://www.gameskinny.com/mvttz/stranded-deep-how-to-refuel-your-campfire Wed, 06 May 2020 10:54:43 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Just like any other survival game, you'll need to know how to refuel your campfire in Stranded Deep. It's super simple, and in this quick tips guide, we'll tell you exactly how to do it once it becomes empty. 

Campfires in Stranded Deep are used for light and, more importantly, cooking fish, crab, and other delicious meat. If you mean to survive the desolate island life, you'll need to keep your campfire fueled, whether its lit or not. 

How to Refuel Your Campfire in Stranded Deep

To keep your fire going, you'll need wood sticks. Initially, you can find wood sticks lying on the ground. But after you've picked them all up on your first island, you'll need more. As far as I can tell, they don't respawn on the ground. 

Luckily, there are other immediate sources of fuel on your island: ficus trees and palm trees

Ficus Trees

These trees have three thin trunks coming up out of the ground. You can chop them down with the stone cutting tool, the knife, or the axe. You'll get 3 wood sticks for your efforts.  

Palm Trees

Palm trees must be cut down with the axe. First, chop down the tree. Once it's on the ground, chop the trunk with the axe. It will eventually break into two separate pieces. Now, chop each piece until it breaks apart into 4 wood sticks

Refuel the Campfire

You'll need 4 wood sticks to refill a completely empty campfire. You must equip the sticks from your inventory; they won't automatically come out of your inventory. You will know that your campfire is completely empty because it will say "Empty Fire" when you look at it. 

Simply walk up to the campfire with the wood sticks equipped and press and hold

  • "E" on PC
  • "Square" on PS4
  • "X" on Xbox One

The campfire will refill in 1/4 increments, with a white circle filling in around the flame icon on the fire. Once the white circle is completely filled, use kindling (2x wood stick) to light it. 

You can refill your campfire by adding wood sticks before it runs out of propellant. Simply walk up to it with the wood sticks in hand and press "E"/"Square"/"X". You don't need to hold it. 

---

And that's it on how to refuel your empty campfire in Stranded Deep. For more on the deep-sea survival game, be sure to check out our other content on the game, including how to craft a speargun and how to find clay, among many others! 

Check out our growing collection of Stranded Deep guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Legends of Runeterra Guide: Best Cheap Decks to Climb With https://www.gameskinny.com/6lyzz/legends-of-runeterra-guide-best-cheap-decks-to-climb-with https://www.gameskinny.com/6lyzz/legends-of-runeterra-guide-best-cheap-decks-to-climb-with Tue, 05 May 2020 12:12:12 -0400 Jonny Foster

[{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/e/cheap-deck-483b6.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/e/cheap-deck-483b6.jpg","type":"slide","id":"210258","description":"

Ashe/Garen

\n
    \n
  • Archetype: Midrange
  • \n
  • Crafting Cost: 22,900 Shards
  • \n
  • Creator: BBG (old list)
  • \n
\n

Finally, this suggestion is a little off-the-wall. Ashe/Garen was a concept that floated around in the final week of the Beta patches, and I think there's a good chance we'll see a similar list make a return. 

\n

This deck has a great matchup against other Demacian Midrange decks, which are extremely popular at the moment. 

\n

The exact build pictured above is based off the cards that are given during the tutorial and as daily login rewards, so this should be an extremely cheap deck to test out and change as you see fit. 

\n

As with other Midrange decks, the winning strategy is to play strong units as soon as you can and defend them in battle. 

\n

---

\n

That's it for our best cheap decks to climb with guide. We have loads of additional tips and guides for Legends of Runeterra over on our dedicated page, including a look at how to play Aggro, Midrange, and Control decks!

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/e/cheap-deck-43cf3.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/e/cheap-deck-43cf3.jpg","type":"slide","id":"210253","description":"

Championless Undying

\n
    \n
  • Archetype: Midrange
  • \n
  • Crafting Cost: 11,100 Shards
  • \n
  • Creator: Mogwai
  • \n
\n

While Undying decks haven't really seen much interest since the Rising Tides Expansion, this is a very viable budget deck that won't waste any shards or wildcards on Champions. 

\n

This deck has multiple ways to kill The Undying and bring it back even stronger, and most decks don't have good tools to out-value this strategy. 

\n

Blighted Caretaker could be one consideration to add from the latest expansion, as it's another way to kill your units to give you more board presence.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/e/cheap-corina-30214.png","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/e/cheap-corina-30214.png","type":"slide","id":"210309","description":"

Corina Control

\n
    \n
  • Archetype: Control
  • \n
  • Crafting Cost: 18,600 Shards
  • \n
  • Creator: Alanzq (full list)
  • \n
\n

This is a budget version of Corina Control, which is one of the best Control decks in the meta right now. 

\n

The full version includes three copies of Vi, three copies of Elise and Commander Ledros, and so on, but this is still a potent budget version.

\n

The idea here is to stall the game with your spells until you can use Commander Ledros and Corina Veraza to quickly put the game to bed.

\n

One of the main reasons why I'd recommend this deck is because a good chunk of these cards is given to you during the tutorial and the daily login rewards, so most players will already have the majority of a Corina Control core.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/e/cheap-deck-2b720.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/e/cheap-deck-2b720.jpg","type":"slide","id":"210254","description":"

Burn Aggro

\n
    \n
  • Archetype: Aggro
  • \n
  • Crafting Cost: 14,500 Shards
  • \n
  • Creator: swim (new list)
  • \n
\n

Next up we have an aggressive burn deck that tries to win the game before your opponent can get online. This is an older deck that's been enhanced by the addition of Noxian Fervor and Imperial Demolitionist in the latest expansion.

\n

There isn't much else to say about this deck; just play cheap units and swing until your opponent's Nexus explodes. 

\n

Some versions of this list have even started cutting Draven, slotting in Transfusion and Statikk Shock instead. This gives the deck even more early kill potential and makes it a budget-friendly deck that can win games quickly. 

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/e/cheap-deck-d6c6f.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/e/cheap-deck-d6c6f.jpg","type":"slide","id":"210255","description":"

Kinkou Elusives

\n
    \n
  • Archetype: Midrange/Aggro
  • \n
  • Crafting Cost: 18,200 Shards
  • \n
  • Creator: swim
  • \n
\n

Kinkou Elusives was a staple in the meta during LoR's Beta patches. This deck was relevant for months and with good reason: it's a solid deck that can end games relatively early with decent consistency.

\n

The gameplan is still viable and pretty simple; you use Zed and Elusive units to swing over your opponent's board. 

\n

At 18,200 shards, this is a reasonably-priced deck that can definitely win you games. Alternative cards include Concussive Palm and Shared Spoils, but this deck can also run effectively without a full playset of Zed if need be.

\n

More recent versions have been experimenting with a Bilgewater build to utilize Fizz and other new Elusive units, but that's still a little unproven.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/e/cheap-deck-b44cf.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/e/cheap-deck-b44cf.jpg","type":"slide","id":"210252","description":"

Climbing in card games (CCGs) can be really rough. Thankfully, Legends of Runeterra competitive decks are rich and diverse, and budget variations of decks can still be viable. 

\n

With that in mind, let's take a look at some of the best cheap decks to craft in Legends of Runeterra if you're looking to climb the ladder.

\n

Endure Spiders

\n
    \n
  • Archetype: Control/Combo
  • \n
  • Crafting Cost: 15,500 Shards
  • \n
  • Creator: squishyflap (new list)
  • \n
\n

First up we have Endure Spiders, a deck that rapidly throws weak units at your opponent before finishing the game with a buffed up They Who Endure combined with Atrocity.

\n

This strategy worked well in the Beta patches of Runeterra, and the creator has updated the list with some of the new expansion's cards — notably, Neverglade Collector for added chip damage.

\n

A newer version of the list has started adding in Maokai, but that adds a lot of expense, pushing it out of the "budget" category.

"}]]]>
Stranded Deep Speargun: How to Craft and Use It https://www.gameskinny.com/3awsz/stranded-deep-speargun-how-to-craft-and-use-it https://www.gameskinny.com/3awsz/stranded-deep-speargun-how-to-craft-and-use-it Tue, 05 May 2020 12:01:20 -0400 Sergey_3847

Getting the Stranded Deep speargun is essential if you want to hunt and catch some of the game's larger fish and prey, including the great white shark, the moray eel, and other large animals and bosses. This tips guide will show you how to craft and use speargun, helping you get off the hook in sticky situations. 

Below, we'll go over the crafting recipes for both the speargun and speargun arrows. We'll also show you how to use the speargun while hunting and fishing. 

Stranded Deep Speargun Guide

Speargun Crafting Recipe

Here are components necessary for crafting the speargun:

  • 1x leather
  • 1x duct tape
  • 2x stick
  • 1x air tank

Air tanks can only be found inside hard cases and lockers in shipwrecks. Duct tape can be found in crates; sticks can be found lying on the ground or by chopping wooden logs, driftwood piles, and Ficus trees; and leather can be crafted at the tanning rack and can be found by skinning boars and sharks. 

Crafting Recipe for Speargun Arrows

The speargun cannot shoot ordinary arrows. Instead, it uses special speargun arrows. Here is the crafting recipe for one speargun arrow:

  • 1x stick
  • 1x lashing

We've outlined how to find sticks above, but you can find lashing by cutting down small palm saplings and yucca trees, or by picking up four leaves from the ground. You can craft lashings in your crafting menu. 

Using a Speargun in Hunting and Fishing

To use the speargun, all you need to do is aim by pressing the "L2/LT" buttons on PS4 and Xbox One or "RMB" on PC.

When you're ready to shoot, press "LMB" on PC or "Square" on PS4/"X" on Xbox One.

---

That's it on how to craft and use the speargun in Stranded Deep. Whether you're diving in the battleship or traversing your island, the speargun is a powerful weapon to have in your inventory.

Check out the list below for more topics on Stranded Deep:

Check out our growing collection of Stranded Deep guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Gears Tactics Acts and Chapters: How Many are in the Game? https://www.gameskinny.com/6t2vh/gears-tactics-acts-and-chapters-how-many-are-in-the-game https://www.gameskinny.com/6t2vh/gears-tactics-acts-and-chapters-how-many-are-in-the-game Mon, 04 May 2020 20:16:46 -0400 GS_Staff

Gears Tactics acts and chapters are split up a little differently from other games in the series. Whereas Gears 5 has 15 chapters spread across four acts, and Gears of War 4 has 21 chapters spread across five acts, Gears Tactics shoves all of its missions into three acts. 

All said, Gears Tactics has 22 chapters across three acts. Though missions and acts follow a similar structure to previous games in the franchise, the main story is about twice as long as any other Gears game. 

According to How Long to Beat, Gears Tactics clocks in at about 20 hours. 

Gears Tactics Acts and Chapters

Acts and Chapters Breakdown
  • Act I: 6 chapters
    • (Brumak boss fight)
  • Act II: 8 chapters
    • (Corpser boss fight)
  • Act III: 8 chapters
    • (Hydra boss fight)

Each chapter has a number of side missions to complete, and each chapter culminates in a boss fight. It's worth noting that side missions are necessary for progress in Gears Tactics, and they act more as new objectives than traditional side missions in other games. 

---

That's it on Gears Tactics acts and chapters. For more on the game, be sure to check out our essential tips guide, as well as our full review of the game

]]>
How to Unlock Characters in Streets of Rage 4 https://www.gameskinny.com/o9wpr/how-to-unlock-characters-in-streets-of-rage-4 https://www.gameskinny.com/o9wpr/how-to-unlock-characters-in-streets-of-rage-4 Mon, 04 May 2020 18:45:08 -0400 Jonathan Moore

If you're wondering how to unlock characters in Streets of Rage 4, then you've come to the right place. Unlike some other games that make you jump through hoops to unlock their hidden rosters, Streets of Rage 4 simply requires you to play through the game. You don't have to find any secrets or beat any of the game's retro levels. 

Below, we'll look at what characters you unlock when, and how to score the most points on each stage. 

How to Unlock Characters in Streets of Rage 4

Character Unlock Levels in Streets of Rage 4

Character unlocks are tied to your lifetime score. After you beat a level in story mode, boss rush, or arcade mode, for example, you will see a progress bar appear on the screen. The nodes on the progress bar represent character unlocks. 

The unlock nodes aren't exactly at regular point intervals, though. Some unlock after 300,000 points, while others become available after 730,000 points. One thing's for sure, though: you're going to need around 1 million points across your lifetime score to unlock the game's full roster.

I've accumulated 725,917 lifetime points after beating the game three and a half times. Depending on how well you play, you might have more points or fewer. 

Here's the order in which you will unlock characters in Streets of Rage 4

  1. SoR1 Axel
  2. SoR1 Adam
  3. SoR1 Blaze
  4. SoR2 Axel
  5. SoR2 Blaze
  6. SoR2 Max + Skate
  7. SoR3 Axel
  8. SoR3 Blaze
  9. SoR3 Eddie
  10. SoR3 Dr. Zan
  11. SoR3 Shiva

You unlock SoR4 Adam Hunter after beating Chapter 4 in the game's story mode. You can do this with any character, including Axel, Blaze, Cherry, and Floyd. 

Eight Streets of Rage 4 trophies and achievements are tied to beating the game: four with SoR4 characters and four with retro characters. 

How to Get More Points in Streets of Rage 4

The total points you get after completing a stage varies based on several factors: 

  • Stage Score
  • Time Bonus
  • Health Bonus
  • Star Bonus
  • First-Clear
  • Stage-Rank
    • New-Rank

Stage Score

This is the score you get while playing the level. It can be seen above your life bar. In-level score is increased by defeating enemies, getting high combos, picking up money bags and suitcases, picking up stars, and picking up food. 

To get higher combos, make use of back attacks, throws, weapons, and environmental objects such as cars, newsstands, barrels, and chairs. Don't always go into a full combo, either. Certain enemies can be staggered by a single hit (love-tap) over and over again, giving you time to line up other enemies or objects or to set up invincibility-frame attacks.  

By the same token, you can use environmental objects to keep combos going between enemy spawns, and you can throw weapons to elongate combos if enemies are out of reach. 

Always pick up food, even if you don't need it; it adds to your score, whether it adds to your life bar or not. 

Completion Time

The faster you complete a stage, the more points you'll get. In the hierarchy of points, you'll often get far more the faster you beat a stage than you would preserving your health and star bonuses. 

Health Bonus

The more lives you have when you finish a level, the more points you'll receive at the end of the level. Try to not only stay alive as much as possible but also to gather in-level points to get extra lives for the highest scores. 

Star Bonus

Star Moves are big special moves that can get you out of sticky situations. You start each level with one, which is denoted by a star underneath your health bar. As you play through levels, you come across more stars for more Star Moves. 

However, the more stars you have left at the end of a level, the more points you'll get. If you're trying to unlock characters fast, try to use Star Moves as little as possible.  

First-Clear Score

This is the score you get for beating a level with a new character, which includes starting characters and each secret character. You only get this score once per level for each character. 

Stage-Rank/New-Rank Score

Stage-Rank Score is the score you get for achieving any rank on a level. New-Rank Score is the score you get for achieving a new rank on any level. You will get more points for changing D-Rank to S-Rank than D-Rank to C-Rank, for example, but getting better ranks is always a good thing. 

---

That's all you need to know about how to unlock characters in Streets of Rage 4. There aren't too many secrets to doing it quickly, but hopefully, these tips and tricks will help you unlock the game's retro characters as fast as possible. For more on SoR4, be sure to check out our retro levels guide, as well as our official review

]]>
Gears Tactics Beginner's Guide — 5 Tips to Defeat the Locust Horde https://www.gameskinny.com/ozloy/gears-tactics-beginners-guide-5-tips-to-defeat-the-locust-horde https://www.gameskinny.com/ozloy/gears-tactics-beginners-guide-5-tips-to-defeat-the-locust-horde Mon, 04 May 2020 16:22:33 -0400 Jonny Foster

Gears Tactics is a gnarly take on the turn-based tactical strategy genre, and I don't just mean the chainsaw executions. This game can be tough, and on the higher difficulties it's downright punishing, but we're here to help with five of the best tips to help you conquer Gears Tactics' challenging gameplay.

Below, go over how to use and abuse downtime, why you should always be recruiting, how to get tricky with overwatches, how to easily deal with E-Holes, and tricks for prioritizing action points (and the best to look out for in each class). 

#1: Use and Abuse Downtime

The first tip we have for you is to make use of your downtime.

After clearing areas of grubs, you’re often given a short period of respite to reach the next objective, such as opening a gate or regrouping at an evac point. 

During this downtime, you’re free to waste a few turns waiting for your important cooldowns to return. This is particularly useful with the Support’s healing grenades and abilities, as you can top up your squad without fear of retaliation. 

Gears Tactics does eventually spawn enemy reinforcements to try and counteract this tactic, though, so don’t try this indefinitely. 

You can usually get away with 2-3 turns without any issue, but you can also leave your units overwatching a large area to drastically reduce any threats. 

#2: Always Be Recruiting

Recruits will usually have multiple weapon mods, often better than the ones you’ve found yourself. These can be swapped over to your Heroes to boost your primary team’s power level. 

For instance, I didn’t have any mods to give Mikayla when she joined my party, but by recruiting a rookie Sniper at the same time, I was able to pass all of their upgrades onto her, immediately making her a bigger threat. 

If you see multiple recruits with the “leaves after 1 mission” text but have limited spaces, you can always recruit each troop individually, remove their gear, dismiss them, and then repeat this cycle with each available troop. 

Once you’re in the final act, this tactic isn’t as useful as you’ll have acquired some rarer mods, but you will frequently run into new recruits that are a higher level than your existing team members, so make sure to update your roster regularly

#3: Get Tricky with Overwatches

Enemy overwatch cones can be a real menace, but there are some helpful tools to get around them. 

First, make use of Waypoints.

Waypoints allow you to fine-tune your movement to sneak past overwatch cones while still being efficient with your actions. By default, these are set to "CTRL + MB1," or "LT + A" on controller.

Next, know that Gears Tactics has friendly fire.

You can abuse this by walking through an enemy's overwatch cone that is lined with another enemy. If you’re careful with your alignment, you can often trigger the overwatch and watch as a Locust drone shoots its friend in the back instead of you. 

This goes both ways, though, never stack your own overwatch cones over an ally! 

Finally, there’s a little trick that can help you avoid overwatch shots on a rare occasion. 

If you absolutely have to activate an enemy’s overwatch, try running your soldier over the outside corner of the cone, as this seems to be the least accurate area of their vision. This sometimes lets you escape without a scratch, but it’s a last-gasp tactic.

#4: Emergency E-Hole Repellent 

Gears Tactics makes it pretty clear in the first mission that you can close Emergence Holes with a grenade toss, right? But what if your grenade is on cooldown, or your unit is out of range? 

Well, there are a few extra ways to stop E-Holes from ruining your day. The first is pretty simple: layer the opening with Overwatches

This will usually clear out any surfacing enemies, but you often have a swarm of existing Locust enemies on the map that you can’t afford to ignore, so what else can we do? 

Boomshots and Torque Bow shots can also close E-Holes safely from a distance, which is often your best bet if you’ve managed to pick up one of these powerful weapons. 

The final method of stopping E-Holes is by using the Grenade Plant ability before the hole opens. This closes the hole as soon as it opens, preventing any enemies from funneling through. 

It also doesn’t go on cooldown if you’ve thrown a grenade recently, which is incredibly useful. Just make sure to plant the grenade and then run away, that explosion will likely kill your soldier instantly. 

#5: Prioritize Action Skills

There’s one universal tip when it comes to deciding which skills you should unlock for your soldiers: always pick skills that give you free actions

Getting free actions in a turn-based strategy game is like having free draws in a card game, or free turns in a tabletop game — it accelerates what you can accomplish in a single turn drastically. 

Some key skills to look out for are Teamwork and Empower in the Support’s skill tree, Chain Shot and Ultimate Shot in the Sniper’s skill tree, and Breach for the Vanguard.

These skills, especially when used in combination, can seriously change the outlook of a battle. Sure, Snipers can be built to take down big enemies in a single shot, but clearing out five units and repositioning in one turn is almost always better in my book.

---

Those are some of our best tips and tricks for getting started in Gears Tactics on the right foot. Do you have any tips and tricks other players should know about? Let us know in the comments below.

For more on Gears Tactics, why not check out our review?

]]>
Population Zero Beginner's Tips and Tricks Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/uvmza/population-zero-beginners-tips-and-tricks-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/uvmza/population-zero-beginners-tips-and-tricks-guide Mon, 04 May 2020 13:35:06 -0400 Sergey_3847

There's a lot going on in Population Zero, the new survival MMO from Enplex Games. However, as a beginner, you'll first want to know about crafting, technologies, and combat, the three cornerstones of the game. 

This Population Zero beginner's guide will take a look at each of those categories below, preparing you for the journey ahead. It will also look at the game's PvE and PvP elements. 

Population Zero Beginner's Tips and Tricks Guide

How to Craft Items in Population Zero

Resources in Population Zero are required for two things: survival and crafting. You can survive by drinking clean water and by eating food. However, you'll also want to grab certain resources for crafting. 

Luckily, it's really easy to find materials because they are often highlighted very well; you won't miss too much in the game's darker areas if you look for an item's distinctive glow.

Crafting items can be found by interacting with plants, trees, bushes, etc., as well as "stranded" bags lying on the ground. To get the items you need, simply walk up to a plant, tree, or bag and press "E" to interact with it

Crafting recipes are directly connected with technologies in the game's technology tree. Once you have a technology unlocked (which we'll talk about below), the corresponding recipe will appear in your crafting menu.

Follow these steps to access the crafting menu:

  1. Press the "I" key to open your inventory
  2. Select the "Technologies" tab
  3. Choose recipes from the right menu

You can craft simple items on your own out in the world, such as flasks, ropes, and simple tools, but more complex items, such as swords or armor, can only be crafted at the crafting stations in the game's hub area

The crafting station at the hub can be found on the top-most platform behind Radov.

Some crafting stations are unlocked and ready for use from the very beginning of the game, but others will require you to complete quick fetch quests before they become available. Some of these fetch quests will familiarize you with certain flora, which you can also use in crafting, so it's doubly important to complete them as you advance in the game. 

Items you craft in the crafting menu automatically appear in your inventory. Items you craft via crafting stations must be picked up and may take a few minutes before they appear.

Population Zero Technologies and Perks

You will earn crafting points as you discover new items and unlock new areas. Crafting points can be used to unlock technologies in the technology tree menu.

There are many (many) technologies to unlock, though you probably won't need many of them early on. Here are some of the best technologies you can to unlock early in Population Zero:

  • Flask
  • Campfire
  • Hammer
  • Rope

Flasks are needed for clean water, which you need to drink regularly. Bonfires will allow you to cook raw meat and turn it into grilled meat, which you can eat. Hammers will come in handy as melee weapons for farming animal bones and leather.

There are also two types of perks in Population Zero: permanent perks and temporary perks. Temporary perks can be earned by completing various actions as you progress through the game, and they can be converted into permanent perks by unlocking permanent slots in the perks menu.

You can use this to save the best perks you've earned by putting them into your unlocked permanent slots.

Here are some of the best perks you should convert to permanent as quickly as possible:

  • Thick Skin: protects you from piercing damage
  • Damage Increase: increases the damage output of your weapon
  • Accelerated Wound Dressing: heals your wounds faster
Population Zero Weapons and Combat

At this early stage in development, combat in Population Zero is far from perfect. There are no special abilities, and fighting (either in PvE or PvP) is relegated to spamming the LMB while aiming at the object of your aggression. You can jump sideways and dodge the attacks, but there isn't much more to combat. 

Most mobs and enemies are fast and strong, so you will want to avoid combat as much as possible. You can die at any moment — even from the least-threatening enemy.

The best way to get bones and leather, for example, is to look out for Yutts and Kvars, which typically fight each other to the death. Wait for them to kill each other, then pick through their remains to get the loot you need.

If you want to fight other mobs, then it's often best to do so near the game's hub station: Kill the mobs and quickly return to the hub to restore health. It might be a bit boring, but it is the safest and surest way to stay alive early on.

If you die too often in Population Zero, you will turn into a monster called The Void. Right now, you can only play four hours as the void before starting over. 

PvP in Population Zero is done on a separate server as the game's PvE mode, and it has its own rules of engagement. You can access PvP mode once your character reaches Level 2.

In PvP mode:

  • Players can freely deal damage to each other, which is impossible in the PvE survival mode
  • Players can loot player corpses, chests, and bases
  • Players lose all resources when they die
  • The Void can cause damage to both normal players and other Voids

---

That's all for the beginner's guide to Population Zero, but be sure to come back soon for more related guides at GameSkinny.

]]>
Stranded Deep: How to Get Clay https://www.gameskinny.com/pojx0/stranded-deep-how-to-get-clay https://www.gameskinny.com/pojx0/stranded-deep-how-to-get-clay Mon, 04 May 2020 13:11:55 -0400 Sergey_3847

Clay is undoubtedly one of the most essential materials in Stranded Deep. It is used in crafting such important items like bricks and water bottles, two staples of survival.

Before mining for clay you will need to craft a pickaxe, which then can be used for getting clay off of clay rocks. Keep on reading below for more info.

How to Get Clay in Stranded Deep

Clay rocks almost always spawn under the water, but fortunately for all of us, usually in the shallow waters close to the shore.

So dive into the water and search for clay stones that are hard to miss. These are huge boulders that are highlighted when approached.

In order to get clay, just hit the rocks a few times with a pickaxe and collect all the clay that has been scattered from the rock.

Don't attempt looking for clay on the surface, as this material doesn't spawn in dry areas.

How to craft a Refined Pick

If you don't have a pickaxe to mine for clay, then here is the crafting recipe for a Refined Pick, the best mining tool in Stranded Deep:

  • 2x Leather
  • 2x Stone Tool
  • 1x Stick
Crafting Recipes Using Clay

Clay is used in a variety of items and buildings. Below you will find a list of all possible crafting recipes that use clay:

Accessory
Recipe
Brick 2x Clay
1x Brick Station
1x Furnace
Fuel Still
1x Jerrycan
2x Lashing
4x Stick
2x Planks
2x Clay
1x Fire Pit
Furnace 2x Lashing
3x Stick
6x Clay
Brick Station
3x Clay
3x Planks
Water Bottle
1x Lashing
2x Clay
1x Furnace

 

That's it on how to get clay in Stranded Deep. Check out the list below for more helpful content on the game:

Check out our growing collection of Stranded Deep guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Stranded Deep: Fish Trap Crafting Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/osy91/stranded-deep-fish-trap-crafting-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/osy91/stranded-deep-fish-trap-crafting-guide Mon, 04 May 2020 13:06:36 -0400 Sergey_3847

Fish are a great source of meat in Stranded Deep. A big fish such as cod can be especially valuable, if you can catch it using a fish trap. If you want to know how to craft a fish trap in Stranded Deep, then follow our guide below.

The crafting recipe for fish trap is quite simple, but there are a few important details when it comes to placing and setting up the fish trap.

Fish Trap Crafting and Bait Guide

Step 1: Craft a Fish Trap

Before crafting a fish trap you will need to collect the following materials:

  • 2x Lashing
  • 2x Rock
  • 6x Stick

Then, follow these steps to craft a fish trap:

  1. Open the game's menu
  2. Select "Crafting" tab
  3. Select "Hunting" option
  4. Choose "Fish Trap"

If you have all the required materials, the fish trap will spawn right in front of you.

Step 2: Place a Fish Trap

When you have the fish trap ready, use the L2/LT buttons on consoles or right mouse button on PC to drag the trap into the water.

If you want to catch a bigger fish, which is recommended, then you need to place the trap under the water as far away from the shore as possible. Just don't forget where you left it.

The deeper the water, the bigger your catches. Keep that in mind when placing your traps.

Step 3: Set Up a Trap

Previously, players needed to put bait inside the fish trap to catch fish. However, the developer has removed this necessity in the latest build of the game, and all you need to do is simply set up the trap once you've placed it in the desired location.

When you're ready to set up a trap, approach it and press the "E" key on PC, the square button on PS4, or the X on Xbox One.

You can use the same keys/buttons to dismantle the trap in case you want to change its location.

---

That's it on how to craft fish traps. Check out the list below for more helpful articles:

Check out our growing collection of Stranded Deep guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Assassin's Creed Valhalla Preorder Bonuses and Editions Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/dj2id/assassins-creed-valhalla-preorder-bonuses-and-editions-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/dj2id/assassins-creed-valhalla-preorder-bonuses-and-editions-guide Fri, 01 May 2020 20:46:18 -0400 GS_Staff

Assassin's Creed Valhalla preorder editions are now available from a variety of retailers. As expected, there are several preorder bonuses up for grabs across several editions. Below we outline what's in the standard edition of the game, as well as what you expect to get in the gold edition, ultimate edition, and collector's edition. 

Assassin's Creed Valhalla is set to release sometime in Holiday 2020 for both current-gen and next-gen platforms, including PC, PS4, Xbox One, PS5, Xbox Series X, and Stadia. It will be exclusive to the Epic Games Store and Ubisoft Store on PC. 

While the game is available for preorder on current platforms, it is not yet available for preorder on the PS5 or Xbox Series X. It is also not up for early purchase on Stadia. 

Assassin's Creed Valhalla Preorder Bonuses and Editions Guide

Assassin's Creed Valhalla Standard Edition

Assassin's Creed Valhalla Standard Edition Way of the Berserker Mission

The standard edition of Assassin's Creed Valhalla comes with the base game on PC, PS4, and Xbox One. It also includes "The Way of the Berserker" mission, which comes with all preorders. This version is available in both physical and digital formats for $60. 

PlayStation 4

Xbox One

PC

Assassin's Creed Valhalla Gold Edition

Assassin's Creed Valhalla Gold Edition

The gold edition of Assassin's Creed Valhalla comes with the base game, the "Way of the Berserker" mission, a steelbook case for physical editions, and the season pass. This version is available in both physical and digital formats for $110 and $100, respectively. 

PlayStation 4

Xbox One

PC

Assassin's Creed Valhalla Ultimate Edition

Assassin's Creed Valhalla Ultimate Edition

The ultimate edition of Assassin's Creed Valhalla comes with the base game, the "Way of the Berserker" mission, a steelbook case for physical editions, the season pass, and the "ultimate pack," which includes the berserker gear pack, the berserker settlement pack, the berserker longship pack, and a set of runes. 

This version is available in both physical and digital formats for $130 and $120 respectively. 

PlayStation 4

Xbox One

PC

Assassin's Creed Valhalla Collector's Edition

Assassin's Creed Valhalla Collector's Edition

The collector's edition of Assassin's Creed Valhalla comes with the ultimate edition of the game and all it bonuses, as well as a 5cm male Eivor statue, a premium certificate of authenticity, a game soundtrack, an exclusive steelbook case, a 30cm female Eivor figure, and three lithographs. 

This physical version is exclusive to the Ubisoft Store and is available for the PC, PS4, and Xbox One. It retails for $200. 

---

That's it for our Assassin's Creed Valhalla preorder and editions guide. We'll update this guide when more retailers and bonuses become available. For more on Assassin's Creed Valhalla, check out the game's reveal trailer

]]>
Trials of Mana: How to Fight the Black Rabite https://www.gameskinny.com/gypek/trials-of-mana-how-to-fight-the-black-rabite https://www.gameskinny.com/gypek/trials-of-mana-how-to-fight-the-black-rabite Fri, 01 May 2020 14:50:23 -0400 Ashley Shankle

Players of the original Seiken Densetsu 3 will remember the sheer brutality of the original Black Rabite fight, and they won't be disappointed with the effort it takes to bring down the little threat in Trials of Mana either.

The Black Rabite is the game's super boss, and you can only face it once you've cleared the final bit of story and start moving into the postgame.

It's up to you whether you decide to do other postgame content before taking on the Black Rabite. I personally recommend that you do the other postgame content first, and come to the fight with each of your character's fourth class.

But before we get into that: Be aware that this guide contains spoilers! Continue at your own risk!

How to Reach the Black Rabite

You've got to find the Black Rabite statue to initiate the fight against this fearsome Level 83 ankle-biter.

Your main character will dictate where you can find the statue in your current playthrough. Check out below to find out where you need to go to find the Black Rabite statue:

  • Kevin and Charlotte can find the Black Rabite statue in the entrance to Mirage Palace
  • Angela and Duran can find the Black Rabite statue in the entrance to Crystal Desert
  • Hawkeye and Riesz can find the Black Rabite statue in the entrance to the Dark Palace

The fight is tough, as the Black Rabite can use more skills than you might expect and has a huge chunk of HP. You may go through all your healing items in the fight, so make sure you've got Candy, Chocolate, Honey Elixir, and even Poto Oil on your item ring.

For your efforts, you will receive a new chain ability: Obsidian Power, which lowers MP costs to zero and is perfect for a New Game+ playthrough where you just want to toss out spells for free.

---

If you're already looking for the Black Rabite, you probably don't need help finding ??? Seeds, but have a link to the guide anyway. Are you doing more playthroughs of Trials of Mana? Let us know in the comments below!

[Note: The company, product, and system names shown here are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. This content contains copyrighted material owned by Square Enix Co., Ltd.  Re-publishing or distribution is prohibited. © 1995, 2019, 2020 SQUARE ENIX CO., LTD. All Rights Reserved.]

]]>
Stranded Deep: How to Build a Raft https://www.gameskinny.com/th4uk/stranded-deep-how-to-build-a-raft https://www.gameskinny.com/th4uk/stranded-deep-how-to-build-a-raft Fri, 01 May 2020 14:21:15 -0400 Sergey_3847

The open world of Stranded Deep is vast, and one of the best ways to traverse the game's enormous world is by using a raft. This quick raft building guide will show you how to build raft in Stranded Deep.

To start the process, you need to open the game's menu, select "Vehicles," and choose "Raft." Then, follow the steps below to craft all the necessary parts.

Stranded Deep: How to Build a Raft

Step 1: Craft a Raft Base

The raft base is the first thing you need to build for your raft. There are four types of bases in the game as of now: 

Base
Recipe
Wood Raft Base
14x Stick
1x Lashing
Buoy Raft Base 5x Buoy Ball
1x Lashing
Tyre Raft Base 2x Tyre
1x Lashing
Barrel Raft Base
3x Barrel
1x Lashing

 

You can build each raft base depending on the resources that you have (you'll need buoys for the buoy base, etc.). However, out of four raft choices in the game right now, the barrel raft base is the most durable.

Barrels can be found tied to the shipwrecks. Use an axe to cut them down.

Step 2: Craft a Raft Floor

When you have your base ready, you need to craft a raft floor, which you can mount on the base:

Floor
Recipe
Driftwood Raft Floor 4x Stick
Plank Raft Floor 2x Plank
Corrugated Raft Base 2x Corrugated Steel
Clay Raft Base
2x Clay Brick

 

The steel and brick floors are the best, especially if you're about to undertake a long journey out to sea. Both of these materials will last you the longest.

Corrugated steel or scrap can be found in crates and on islands. Bricks are much harder to get because you need to build a Brick Station and a furnace, which lets you make bricks out of clay.

Step 3: Craft Accessories

Now you need to craft the rest of your raft accessories to make your raft move, stop, and steer: 

Accessory
Recipe
Boat Motor 1x Duct Tape
1x Engine Part
1x Fuel Part
1x Filter Part
1x Electrical Part
Sail 1x Lashing
1x Cloth
2x Stick
Rudder 1x Lashing
1x Cloth
2x Stick
Anchor
6x Rock
1x Stick
4x Lashing

 

You can find all the necessary parts for the boat motor inside loot crates, which can be found inside shipwrecks and underwater bases.

But if you can't find the parts for the motor, then you can simply use the sail, though you'll move slower.

Once you have the raft base, floor, and accessories, you can press "L2"/"LT" on consoles or "RMB" on PC to drag the raft into the water.

---

That's it for our raft building guide, and all you need to know about how to build raft in Stranded Deep. Check out the list below for more helpful topics:

Check out our growing collection of Stranded Deep guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Animal Crossing May Day Maze Guide: How to Get Through It https://www.gameskinny.com/49ggq/animal-crossing-may-day-maze-guide-how-to-get-through-it https://www.gameskinny.com/49ggq/animal-crossing-may-day-maze-guide-how-to-get-through-it Fri, 01 May 2020 12:34:52 -0400 Joshua Broadwell

It's time for the Animal Crossing May Day event in New Horizons. From now until May 7, you can take a trip to a special island courtesy of Tom Nook and take part in the festivities, including a short little maze.

Our Animal Crossing May Day maze guide is here to take you through the Animal Crossing maze step by step.

Animal Crossing May Day Maze Guide: How to Get Through It

How to Start the Animal Crossing May Day Event

In the day's announcements, Isabelle tells you to stop by Resident Services and chat with Tom Nook for information about the holiday. Go do that, and Nook tells you he's left a special ticket for you at the island's airport that you can use anytime from now until May  7.

Chat with the airport attendant, and he'll tell you what to select when you're ready to fly. Note that you can't take anything with you when you go, but you'll get everything back when you return.

How to Get Through the Animal Crossing May Day Maze

Once you land on the island, Wilbur explains how the maze works. You'll have to use whatever you find to make it through, but if you mess up, you can use the Rescue Service to start again (but you won't mess up because you're reading this guide.)

First, grab the shovel in front of you. Dig up the azalea bushes to the right. That opens a handy way back to the plane once you've finished. Next: eat a peach, dig up the tree in front of you, and follow the path to the back.

Go left. Follow the path around to the three holes. Jump over the middle hole, and you'll find a Worn Axe. You only get three hits with the axe, so don't waste it.

Head back where you came from and chop the tree in front of the two peaches. Your axe breaks, but it's okay. You're on the way to a new one.

Go back to the fork and take the right path this time.

Eat one of the peaches, and bust the stone blocking the way. Grab the two recipes if you never learned the Axe and Flimsy Axe DIY recipes before, then eat the other peach and dig up the tree.

This gives you access to the crafting table. You can make a Flimsy Axe, hooray! Except it’s pointless by itself. You need an Iron Nugget, but the rocks here don’t give up treasure.

So, head back to the spot where you could choose three holes to jump over, and jump the left one. Eat your remaining peach (or whatever fruit you get) and bust the rock so you can grab the Nugget.

Go back and make the regular axe. Now, work your way back through the areas you couldn’t reach before. Make sure you grab all the fruit you find, as you’ll need it to get the Bell vouchers lying around.

By now, you’re out of the maze! Rover’s waiting for you, but you’ll need to dig up the bushes if you want cold, hard cash.

Then get rid of the other obstacles and work your way around the back, stony beach, all the way down the left side of the maze, until you get to the little corner in the bottom left.

Chow some fruit, bust some rocks, and take those sweet, sweet vouchers. You should have nine total now, and after you speak with Rover, you’re ready to head home.

---

The airport gives you back whatever you had in your pockets before you left, and mails the stuff you nabbed on the island (including what you got from Rover). You can go speak with Tom Nook about the experience if you want, but it isn't required.

And that's all you need to know about the Animal Crossing May Day maze. Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more Animal Crossing: New Horizons guides, and be sure to check out our other New Horizons guides too, including:

 

]]>
Streets of Rage 4 Retro Levels: How to Find the Arcade Machines https://www.gameskinny.com/z8bm2/streets-of-rage-4-retro-levels-how-to-find-the-arcade-machines https://www.gameskinny.com/z8bm2/streets-of-rage-4-retro-levels-how-to-find-the-arcade-machines Fri, 01 May 2020 11:21:25 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Streets of Rage 4 arcade machines let you play some of the series' most iconic boss fights through secret retro levels. From Zamza in Streets of Rage 2 to the franchise's big bad, Mr. X., there are four secrets to unlock. But finding all of the arcade machine locations can be a chore, even if you're looking for them. Using them can be even more unclear. 

This guide shows you the location of every arcade machine in Streets of Rage 4 and tells you how to activate them (Hint: use the taser). 

Streets of Rage 4 Arcade Machines Guide: How to Find the Retro Levels

Arcade Machine Retro Level #1 (Stage 2)

Streets of Rage 4 Arcade Machine 1 Stage 2

Bust out of your cell and follow the path right and then up. You'll fight a group of thugs and two cops. Defeat them and continue up. Fight the taser-wielding cop named Barney, but don't beat him!

When his life gets low, the cells above you will open up, letting out a group of enemies, before more cops enter the room. Take care of the other enemies, and leave Barney alone.

Now beat Barney and take his taser. Continue right just a little, and you'll see three doors above you, with the center one open. The arcade cabinet is through the center door.

Destroy the cabinet with the taser to go into the retro arcade world to fight Jack. If you destroy the cabinet with anything else, you'll get a small money bag instead.

Arcade Machine Retro Level #2 (Stage 4)

Streets of Rage 4 Arcade Machine 2 Stage 4

Start the stage and go right across the pier. Eventually, you'll come to a section with a big flashing neon arcade sign. You can't miss it. Fight the cops here and leave a taser unused. Once the fight is over, go into the arcade and bash the cabinet with the taser. You'll fight Zamza and get an extra star for your efforts. 

The best thing to do in this area is to focus on the shield enemies and let the taser cops fight the thugs. Take the Barneys out last. 

Arcade Machine Retro Level #3 (Stage 5)

Streets of Rage 4 Arcade Machine 3 Stage 5

This is the hardest cabinet to get so far. Go all the way through the sewers and up into the bathroom. Go into the bar to your right.

You'll see the arcade cabinet after you fight the first group of Sugar and Honey bikers and Donovans wielding pool sticks. It's at the top of the room just after the big pool table.

The problem here is that the area is swarming with enemies, and they can destroy the cabinet. Try to fight at the bottom and left side of the bar as much as possible. Once you clear out the room, grab a taser, and whack the cabinet. One of the Galsias will drop the taser; it won't be a cop this time.

You'll fight Abadede and get another star.

Arcade Machine Retro Level #4 (Stage 8)

Streets of Rage 4 Arcade Machine 4 Stage 8

Go through the art gallery, and eventually, you'll come to a large desk with a receptionist cowering behind it. This is after the big fight with the grenades.

Go past the desk into the next area. It will be a storeroom with a bunch of golden chickens. The cabinet is at the top of the screen as soon as you enter the room. The taser is hidden directly below the cabinet.

Don't go too far to the right (past the middle crates), or you'll start the boss fight with Rhia and Beyo, losing the cabinet. 

You'll fight Shiva and then Mr. X. You'll also get another star. 

---

That's it for our Streets of Rage 4 arcade cabinets and retro levels guide. Be sure to read our review on the beat em' up to see why it's a modern classic.

]]>
Legends of Runeterra: Best Cards to Craft From Rising Tides Expansion https://www.gameskinny.com/30dz1/legends-of-runeterra-best-cards-to-craft-from-rising-tides-expansion https://www.gameskinny.com/30dz1/legends-of-runeterra-best-cards-to-craft-from-rising-tides-expansion Thu, 30 Apr 2020 15:55:18 -0400 Jonny Foster

[{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/t/a/staples2-cc7be.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/t/a/staples2-cc7be.jpg","type":"slide","id":"210189","description":"

Secondary Staples

\n

These final three may not be considered as widely versatile — or at least, not a staple in multiple archetypes — but they're still a flexible option to craft.

\n
Ember Maiden
\n

Ember Maiden has been overlooked so far, as everyone is playing Bilgewater decks, but the ability to damage the Nexus on multiple turns being attached to a follower is a big deal, and this card will definitely be relevant when the meta settles. 

\n
Pool Shark
\n

Pool Shark is a nice, cheap 1-drop that helps you set up to draw next turn. It's seen a lot of play in early builds of a few archetypes, and the Common rarity means it's cheap to craft.  

\n
Zap Sprayfin
\n

Finally, Zap Sprayfin is Rising Tides' equivalent of Shadow Assassin — a staple in many existing decks. It's a relatively cheap Elusive that draws you a card, and this will see play in quite a few Bilgewater decks for that reason.

\n

---

\n

That's it for the best cards to craft in Rising Tides. For more on Legends of Runeterra, check out our dedicated page for a range of useful guides aimed at all skill levels!

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/t/a/staples-1f263.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/t/a/staples-1f263.jpg","type":"slide","id":"210188","description":"

Staples Cards

\n

These three Bilgewater cards are already staples — versatile cards that are must-includes — in multiple archetypes and show no signs of being replaced. They're also all Common rarity, so they're cheap to craft!

\n
Hired Gun
\n

Hired Gun has a nice health stat of 3, with a valuable effect of granting the Strongest enemy the Vulnerable keyword. 

\n
Dreadway Deckhand
\n

Dreadway Deckhand is the cheapest way of quickly summoning Powder Kegs to increase your damage effects, while also functioning as a psuedo-House Spider (they both summon two bodies for 2 mana, which can be useful to slow down Aggro decks.)

\n
Make It Rain
\n

Make It Rain is just a versatile damage spell that can pick off low-health units. When combined with a Powder Keg, it can be really obscene — and it even activates Ezreal's target triggers!

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/p/i/l/pilfer-e972e.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/p/i/l/pilfer-e972e.jpg","type":"slide","id":"210187","description":"

Pilfer Package

\n

One of the new mechanics added in the Rising Tides Expansion is drawing cards from the enemy's deck. These three cards are all widely used for their ability to pilfer cards from your opponent. 

\n
Yordle Grifter
\n

Yordle Grifter is the Allegiance card for the Bilgewater region, which is often worth playing just for the free copy of Warning Shot that it creates — this is an easy way of activating Plunder effects.

\n
Pilfered Goods
\n

Pilfered Goods is the star of the show, here. It's a 2-mana spell that can reliably steal two cards off the top of your opponent's deck. What's not to love?

\n
Black Market Merchant
\n

Black Market Merchant has a nice effect on its own, pilfering one card from your opponent if the Plunder condition is met. Combined with either of the other two cards in the package, though, and you start to generate some crazy value.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/r/a/draw-07aa4.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/r/a/draw-07aa4.jpg","type":"slide","id":"210186","description":"

Draw Engines

\n

These cards are all useful at drawing extra cards, which is one of the most powerful tools in any card game. 

\n
Salvage
\n

Salvage is perfect for decks that revolve around the Toss and Deep mechanics, but don't discredit it for other Bilgewater builds. The ability to draw two and thin your deck means this is seeing play elsewhere, too.

\n
Twisted Fate
\n

Twisted Fate is probably the most versatile Champion currently in the game. His ability to draw, stun, or deal wide damage when played is extremely useful, and he can take over games when he's leveled — which also requires draws. Synergy!

\n
Pick a Card
\n

Pick a Card, on top of being Twisted Fate's Champion Spell, is being played in multiple early versions of decks for its incredible draw potential. It might take a turn for the payoff to appear, but drawing four-card on your following turn is not to be taken lightly. 

\n

These three also synergize nicely with our next group of cards worth crafting: the Pilfer Package.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/m/i/d/midrange-0ace9.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/m/i/d/midrange-0ace9.jpg","type":"slide","id":"210185","description":"

Marvelous Midrange

\n

These three cards are already seeing lots of play in Demacian Midrange decks, with very good reason.

\n
Grizzled Ranger
\n

Grizzled Ranger has decent stats and the Scout keyword, plus it summons a Loyal Badgerbear when it dies! This essentially gives you a free attack to force out a block from your opponent before swinging with Badgerbear.  

\n
Loyal Badgerbear
\n

Loyal Badgerbear has a very solid stat line as a 4/4 for 3-mana, which is unprecedented for Legends of Runeterra without card text that gives it a downside. 

\n
Genevieve Elmheart
\n

Genevieve Elmheart is a big combo piece for aggressive Midrange/Scout decks. The +1/+1 buff to your board plus Scout and Challenger keywords makes her extremely potent.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/n/controls-b5e52.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/n/controls-b5e52.jpg","type":"slide","id":"210184","description":"

Capital Control

\n

Next up we have three brilliant Control cards that are seeing play in a variety of decks, even some that focus elsewhere but splash Ionia in for these three. 

\n
Eye of the Dragon
\n

Eye of the Dragon is pretty much the perfect card for control decks to push back against aggression. It has great stats for its cost but the Dragonlings it summons help top up your Nexus health nicely.

\n
Deep Meditation
\n

Deep Meditation is a decent spell as a 4-mana card that draws two, but it's very easy to get the discount in spell-based control decks, bringing its cost down to an insane 2 mana.

\n
Concussive Palm
\n

Concussive Palm functions a lot like Will of Ionia, removing a threat for a turn for 4 mana. The big difference here is that Concussive Palm also summons a unit, which is even better at combating Aggro decks.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/a/g/g/aggros-5333d.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/a/g/g/aggros-5333d.jpg","type":"slide","id":"210183","description":"

If you're wondering which cards you should craft from the new Rising Tides Expansion for Legends of Runeterra, you've come to the right place! 

\n

We have a total of 21 versatile cards that we've hand-picked, guaranteed to give you a fighting chance no matter what your playstyle. 

\n

Let's jump right in with an aggressive selection.

\n

Awesome Aggro

\n

Starting with Aggro cards, these three are already looking like the core of a top meta deck.  

\n
Swain
\n

Swain is a slower-paced Aggro card, but he's capable of ending games on his own once you've dealt 12 non-combat damage. His leveled up version can clear an entire board with one attack, which has to be respected.

\n
Imperial Demolitionist
\n

Imperial Demolitionist is a fantastic card for Aggro decks, dealing early damage to the enemy Nexus at a cheap cost. Combine this with Crimson Disciple to really make your opponent's eyes water.

\n
Noxian Fervor
\n

Last but not least, Noxian Fervor has excellent synergy with Swain as it deals a total of 6 non-combat damage in a single card. It can also be a great counter to an opponent's spell or Challenger unit.

"}]]]>
Legends of Runeterra Beginner's Guide — 6 Things the Tutorial Doesn't Teach You https://www.gameskinny.com/ie0wv/legends-of-runeterra-beginners-guide-6-things-the-tutorial-doesnt-teach-you https://www.gameskinny.com/ie0wv/legends-of-runeterra-beginners-guide-6-things-the-tutorial-doesnt-teach-you Thu, 30 Apr 2020 12:38:49 -0400 Jonny Foster

Legends of Runeterra, despite being a fantastic card game, is a little complex. And though the in-game tutorials are pretty diverse and useful, they don't cover everything. Thankfully, we're here to help! 

This Legends of Runeterra guide tells you six things the tutorial doesn't teach you

Legends of Runeterra Beginner's Guide — 6 Things the Tutorial Doesn't Teach You

#1: Don't Trust Everything You See in Runeterra

Let's start with something Legends of Runeterra's tutorial does teach you: people lie. Yep, that's right, Riot lies to you throughout the tutorial

See that "Decisive Action" card pictured above? Doesn't exist. You can't actually craft it; it exists solely in this tutorial segment. 

See that "Final Spark" card also pictured above? It's actually a 0-mana slow spell that Lux creates once she's leveled up. 

There are also various other spells, units, and card text — champion abilities, especially — that have been created purely for the tutorial. They're just there to teach you the basics, so don't expect to build a deck around anything you see in the tutorials!

#2: What Even is a "Champion Spell"?

Next, let's explain something that's only touched on briefly by the tutorials: Champion Spells. In Legends of Runeterra, you can only play one copy of a champion card at a time.

If you have more copies of that champion in your hand — or you draw into them — while the unit on your board is still alive, the excess copies will be converted into a signature spell: their Champion Spell

In the example above, you can see the Champion Spell for Elise, which is a copy of Crawling Sensation. Note that it has the added line of text: every Champion Spell will shuffle a copy of that champion back into the deck when used. If you summon one Elise, any additional copies in your hand will change into this spell. Once the Elise on your board dies, they'll change back to copies of Elise again.

It's simple once you get used to it, but can definitely be confusing for new players. Now, you can summon multiple copies of a Champion at once, but this is done using revive effects like The Rekindler and Mist's Call

#3: Don't Get Overwhelmed

While there is a tutorial revolving around the Overwhelm mechanic, it misses out something vital that most people will attempt at some point: When a unit with Overwhelm attacks into a unit with Barrier, the defender still takes Nexus damage. 

This may seem counter-intuitive at first, as Barriers are supposed to negate damage, but the nuance lies in the wording. 

The keyword text for Barrier states that it "Negates the next damage the unit would take." The Overwhelm damage is not being dealt to the unit, but to the enemy's Nexus, and this portion of the damage still goes through.  

It's important to remember that Overwhelm damage has to be stopped by removing the attacker in some way, as they'll break right through anything you put in front of them that doesn't have a high health stat. 

#4: No Heal For You! 

Speaking of Barriers, there's another useful piece of information you should know about them: they block Lifesteal effects.

This can be the difference between a win and a loss, so countering Lifesteal units with a Barrier can be extremely helpful. 

In the example above, casting Prismatic Barrier on my Tryndamere will stop my opponent's Darkwater Scourge from healing their Nexus. 

The same effect happens when Barriers clash, such as when your opponent plays Spirit's Refuge, for example. Simply counter with your own Barrier effect and they'll be left without any free healing! 

#5: Limited Deck Space

Decks in Legends of Runeterra have to have exactly 40 cards. If you try to draw once you've run out of cards to draw, you immediately lose the game! This is also known as a "deck out".

If both players run out of cards at the same time — or with the same card effect, such as Veteran Investigator — then the game will end as a tie

This is particularly important to know thanks to the Rising Tides Expansion; lots of new Bilgewater cards have the ability to draw from an opponent's deck, and Maokai has a win condition built specifically around decking you out. 

Don't get caught short. Always keep an eye on how many cards you have left!

#6: Unlimited Power!

Finally, let's finish with one of the newest mechanics added to Legends of Runeterra in Patch 1.0. 

The maximum number of units you can own at the same time is six. If you want to play any more beyond this, you can choose a unit to Obliterate and replace.

You used to be stuck with a board of six units and would have to find a way to remove or kill one before you could play any more, so this might be a little confusing for returning players. 

It's important to note that Obliterate is a keyword in Legends of Runeterra that destroys the card completely, preventing it from being revived later, so choose carefully!

You also won't trigger any Last Breath effects from Obliterating the card you replace, either. 

---

There are definitely more advanced things the tutorial also doesn't teach you, so if you're looking for more tips to improve at Legends of Runeterra, look no further than our dedicated guide page

]]>
Destiny 2 Chain Reaction Bounty Guide: How to Complete It https://www.gameskinny.com/5len7/destiny-2-chain-reaction-bounty-guide-how-to-complete-it https://www.gameskinny.com/5len7/destiny-2-chain-reaction-bounty-guide-how-to-complete-it Wed, 29 Apr 2020 13:00:31 -0400 John Schutt

The obtuse nature of the Destiny 2 Chain Reaction bounty is partly to blame for some players and Guardian classes having a rough time in the Guardian Games. This guide will tell you the best way to complete the Chain Reaction bounty in Destiny 2 to put the Hunter class back on top.

We'll also include a few farming locations to help you make (relatively) quick work of the bounty. 

Update: In the This Week at Bungie article (posted 4/30/20), Bungie acknowledged the problems with the Chain Reaction bounty. They note the following:

Nightstalker Hunters using the Way of the Pathfinder must defeat groups of at least five tethered enemies twice. This count will reset when the Shadowshot Super is activated, so if a player is wearing Moebius Quiver it will reset their count every time they fire Shadowshot.

In short, fire only one tether into large groups and kill with your gun. The below article still shows good ways to do this.

How to Complete the Destiny 2 Chain Reaction Bounty

The Chain Reaction bounty is not bugged. You can, in fact, complete it. The problem is that the bounty's written requirements are quite different from what you have to do. 

On the bounty itself, you're asked to tether and kill groups of five enemies using bottom tree Nightstalker. As of right now, the bounty doesn't count to five very well, and you need groups of 15-25 enemies. 

There are only a few places you can group that many easy-to-kill enemies at a time, and the best one remains Level 1 of Escalation Protocol

Start by heading to the Braytech Futurescape and activating the northwestern Escalation plate. 

You'll want to be the only one in your instance of Braytech, so fast travel to the landing zone until no one's around you.

Activate Escalation Protocol and wait for all the Thrall to spawn in. Kite them until they're in a big group, fire your Tether on the ground next to them, then use the remaining five Tether shots to kill as many Thrall as you can.

Because the bounty is so finicky right now, you might have to do those steps multiple times just to get a single tick of progress on Chain Reaction. The trick is not giving up. With perseverance and a little luck, you'll get it done.

Alternate Chain Reaction Farming Locations

While Escalation Protocol is probably the easiest place to farm low-level mobs for Chain Reaction, there are a couple of other locations worth investigating.

The Shuro Chi encounter in the Last Wish raid. Shacknews has a guide on the Wish Wall pattern you'll need to make it to the encounter without doing the raid normally.

All you need to do is start the encounter and near-endless swarms of red bar Taken will attack you. Gather them together and Tether as usual. Repeat the process by wiping and replacing the Raid banner outside the encounter door for a full Super.

The Kingship Dock Lost Sector on the Tangled Shore. Grab a Public Event flag, then enter the Sector and go all the way to the chest at the back. This will spawn a bunch of red-bar enemies for you to Tether. This method wasn't consistent for me, but like Escalation Protocol, it's easy to access and repeat.

Remember, the Chain Reaction bounty isn't the best at counting your Tether kills, so you might need more than two attempts to finish. Don't give up — it's doable.

---

Check out our other Destiny 2 guide content:

]]>
Predator Hunting Grounds Crossplay: How to Turn It On, Invite Friends https://www.gameskinny.com/zjc17/predator-hunting-grounds-crossplay-how-to-turn-it-on-invite-friends https://www.gameskinny.com/zjc17/predator-hunting-grounds-crossplay-how-to-turn-it-on-invite-friends Tue, 28 Apr 2020 17:51:02 -0400 GS_Staff

Predator Hunting Grounds crossplay lets you team up with players on both PlayStation 4 and PC. Not only is it a great way to make sure you always have a full fireteam, but it's also a great way to play with friends who might be on different platforms. 

Crossplay is automatically turned on in Predator Hunting Grounds. That means you'll be playing with both PC and PS4 players from the jump. Below, we tell you how to turn crossplay off, as well as how to invite friends from different platforms. 

Predator Hunting Grounds Crossplay

How to Turn Predator Hunting Grounds Crossplay Off

To turn crossplay off, simply: 

  1. Go to "Options" in the main menu
  2. Click "General" in the Options menu
  3. Click "Crossplay" 
  4. Click "Keep"

You'll now notice that the crossplay option is set to "off" to the right of the "General" tab in the "Options" menu. To turn crossplay back on, just follow the steps above and it will turn back on. 

How to Invite Friends in Crossplay

If you want to play against your friends on another platform, you first need to link your Epic Games Account to your PSN account.

To do so, go to EpicGames.com and sign into your EGS account. If you don't have one, you will have to create and EGS account. 

Once you're signed into EGS via the website, here's how to do it on your desktop PC or laptop:

  1. Hover over your screen name in the top right-hand corner on the Epic Games website
  2. Click "Account"
  3. Click "Connections" on the left-hand side
    • It's the third option from the bottom
  4. Click the blue "Connect" button under PlayStation Network
  5. The page will refresh with a pop-up disclaimer
  6. Click the blue "Link Account" button
  7. Sign in to your PSN account 

Once you're signed into EGS via the website, here's how to do it on your phone:

  1. Press the left-facing arrow in the upper left-hand corner of the screen
  2. Click "Connections," which is the third option from the bottom
  3. Scroll down and click the blue "Connect" button under "PlayStation Network"
    • PlayStation Network is the second option from the bottom
  4. The page will refresh with a pop-up disclaimer
  5. Click the blue "Link Account" button
  6. Sign in to your PSN account 

Now you will be able to invite your friends to your game regardless of their platform.

Note that some users have had issues getting their friends from other platforms to show up, specifically on PS4. Currently, there is not a fix to the problem, though some players have reported that simply exiting the game and restarting it has forced their friends list to refresh. 

---

That's all you need to know about Predator Hunting Grounds crossplay. For more on the asymmetric multiplayer title, be sure to check out our other Predator Hunting Grounds guides

]]>
Predator Hunting Grounds: How to Defuse the Bomb https://www.gameskinny.com/fj7oc/predator-hunting-grounds-how-to-defuse-the-bomb https://www.gameskinny.com/fj7oc/predator-hunting-grounds-how-to-defuse-the-bomb Tue, 28 Apr 2020 15:28:11 -0400 Daniel Hollis

So you're playing Predator Hunting Grounds and your team's just brought the Predator down to their knees. Don't celebrate too soon, as they have one more trick up their sleeve which could completely obliterate your team's chances of survival. In this guide, we'll look at how to defuse the bomb in Predator Hunting Grounds.

Just like in the movies, the Predator can actually activate a self-destruct sequence if not taken down quickly enough. Once they're on their knees, you only have a small window to completely obliterate them while they attempt to set the device and ruin your chances of getting out alive. 

You can run faster than the wind and hightail out of there, but if you're feeling brave enough and have the speed to do it, you can actually disarm the bomb, resulting in a quick victory.

How to Defuse the Bomb in Predator Hunting Grounds

First, you want to completely down the Predator. They will be on their knees in a downed state but still able to activate their self-destruct sequence. Keep laying down the firepower to completely incapacitate them.

Aim for their helmet to remove it and fire at their head to kill them. After they've armed the bomb and they're dead, you have two choices:

  1. Run as fast as you can out of the zone
  2. Try to disarm the bomb

If you choose to disarm the bomb, then investigate the body. A prompt will appear to interact with the body. Hold the prompt button, and you'll have a chance to disarm the bomb.

This is where the tricky part comes in, and it demands your full focus and absolute speed. You'll be presented with a matching mini-game that must quickly be completed if you want any hope of survival and a match win.

Defuse the Bomb Mini-Game

It's a simple matching mini-game, but the short time frame can make it highly stressful.

The bottom bar will have a symbol and the top box will allow you to scroll through and find the appropriate corresponding symbol. Once you've secured the correct matching symbol, press the prompt on screen to lock it in.

The mini-game consists of four symbols that must be matched within a matter of seconds. If the timer runs out, the bomb will go off and your team in the radius will not survive. Complete the mini-game, and you'll defuse the bomb and secure a win.

---

Knowing how to defuse the bomb is as simple as that. It just demands quick reflexes. If you're looking for other quick tips or tricks, be sure to check out our other Predator Hunting Grounds guides to help you reach victory.

]]>
Predator Hunting Grounds: How to Parry the Predator https://www.gameskinny.com/7ny6g/predator-hunting-grounds-how-to-parry-the-predator https://www.gameskinny.com/7ny6g/predator-hunting-grounds-how-to-parry-the-predator Tue, 28 Apr 2020 14:25:43 -0400 Daniel Hollis

While Predator Hunting Grounds does a good job of introducing you to how the Predator operates, it's fairly obtuse on how to function as a standard marine. In fact, it doesn't tell you how to parry the Predator, which is one of the game's more strategic, yet life-saving moves.

Playing as a marine might seem fairly straightforward  shoot and run, right? Well, the soldiers themselves actually have a few tricks up their sleeves to help keep them stay alive longer than you might think.

One of these methods is a quick parry, which blocks a Predator's melee attacks. When you're casually strolling along, only to be met face first with a Predator's blade, it might seem as though survival is impossible. Yet, this simple and effective trick can help turn the tide in your favor. 

How to Parry the Predator in Predator Hunting Grounds

There's probably a plethora of times you've met your demise after facing the seemingly unblockable melee attacks of a Predator in Predator Hunting Grounds. When faced with him viciously thrusting away with their powerful blades, it can all seem futile.

However, utilizing the block mechanic is useful, and it's a tool that can consistently mean the difference between life and death.

When to Parry in Predator Hunting Grounds

The parry in Predator Hunting Grounds takes a lot of resilience and quick action. As the Predator swipes with their blade, you will have a quick second to block. A prompt actually appears on the screen, but it's such a split-second decision that it's entirely possible not to see which button to press before you miss it completely.

To parry, press the melee button at the exact moment the Predator strikes. You will bring up your melee weapon at the exact moment and block their powerful attack. It's an extremely quick maneuver and will undoubtedly take a bit of trial and error.

If successful, you will hear the metal of the Predator's blades clink, and they will step back, staggered and unable to continue attacking you. This gives you a few precious seconds to perform one of two actions:

  1. You can either make like the wind and get out of there
  2. You and your team can unleash a sea of bullets directly into their face in an attempt to incapacitate them 

This type of back-and-forth combat can make for some exhilarating encounters that require some tactical thought. So, while it's a tricky method to get behind, with practice and perseverance, you'll be able to knock back Predators left, right, and center.

---

And that's it on how to parry and turn the tide of the fight when it comes down to hand-to-hand combat. Looking for more tricks and tips? Be sure to check out the other Predator Hunting Grounds guides available here.

]]>
Legends of Runeterra Guide — How to Play from Behind and When Ahead https://www.gameskinny.com/e77ni/legends-of-runeterra-guide-how-to-play-from-behind-and-when-ahead https://www.gameskinny.com/e77ni/legends-of-runeterra-guide-how-to-play-from-behind-and-when-ahead Tue, 28 Apr 2020 12:18:13 -0400 Jonny Foster

Welcome to another guide in our series on Legends of Runeterra (LoR). To recap: I’m a Masters player on the EUW ladder in Runeterra and want to help the community improve. This guide does require basic knowledge of the game mechanics, but will hopefully, be accessible to all. 

As I touched on at the end of my previous LoR guide on Open Attack, one of the most important decision-swaying factors in a card game is whether you’re ahead or behind.

To put it simply: when playing from behind, you want to take more risks.

By the same metric, when you’re ahead of your opponent, you should play safer. These are pretty sweeping generalizations, of course, and strictly speaking, the “ideal” play is never this simple. But that’s a good place to start. 

What do we actually mean by ahead and behind, though?

When using these terms, we’re describing how likely we are to win given the current state of the board and each player's hand. This fluctuates constantly with matchups, draws, and which cards each player decides to play, but you can get a pretty good idea of your win-probability once you get some decent experience. 

To put it another way, we’re assessing whether we’re closer to meeting our win condition than the opponent is to meeting theirs.

Aggro decks, for instance, win by killing the opponent quickly — usually before turn 7 or turn 8 — but they quickly run out of steam and struggle to defeat decks that can heal and grind out games. 

Above is an example of a fairly popular Aggro deck, and you can see that only one card costs more than 3 mana to play.

If you’re playing against an Aggro deck that’s taken 15 HP off your Nexus by turn 4, then you've fallen pretty far behind. If you still have 10 HP on turn 10 and they only have two cards in hand with an empty field, it’s safe to say you’re probably ahead.

In general, though, you're normally behind when playing against an Aggro deck. The game becomes a race to stabilize your board before you die. 

How should this affect our play, and what do we mean by risks? Well, let’s look at some examples of how to play when ahead and behind to get a better idea of what we mean.

Risky Business

In this first example, we’re ahead while playing a Corina Control mirror match in Masters. For context: when playing against decks (like ours) that don’t summon many units, playing Commander Ledros on turn 9 is pretty much always better than playing Corina Veraza

Our opponent played Corina last turn, which indicates that they didn’t have a Ledros in hand. We played ours in response, putting us firmly in the lead. Our Nexus has higher HP than our opponent’s, we likely have a better hand than them, and we have a better field.  

In this position, we could use Statikk Shock to dig for more burn damage or attack to force them to trade and then replay our Ledros. However, the safest play here is to summon our own Corina. This presents the biggest upfront threat by summoning another attacker and dealing some direct burn damage in the process. 

A good answer to this would be my opponent playing The Ruination, but we don't particularly mind that. We're getting the burn damage in, and we have more in our hand to close out the game. 

In the second example, below, I’m playing the same deck against a Yasuo deck. 

I’m pretty far behind in this game, with less Nexus HP than my opponent, a worse field, and their Yasuo is nearly leveled up. If I can't kill their units or summon more of my own, they will most likely kill me on their next attack.

With the hand I have, playing Commander Ledros feels like the safe play, as I know my opponent likely has Deny and the alternative (The Ruination) would leave me without any units if it's countered. 

This is likely the wrong call, however, and I should take the risk on Ruination. Why? Simply put, Ledros isn’t enough to turn this game in my favor, and I’ve stifled my future turns.

In the position I am in, hoping my opponent has no Deny is certainly a big risk, but the payoff for gambling and successfully killing their board will be a huge swing in my favor.

My opponent ended up using Deny as I feared, so playing Ruination on my turn is also now less valuable as my opponent will have the mana to re-establish a board and finish me off with an Open Attack when I pass back to them.

If I played these two cards in the opposite order, I'd have a better chance of winning than I do in the screenshot above. 

Don't worry if these examples aren't immediately useful, as they are very specific. The main thing to take away from this guide is that when you're ahead, you want to be careful about what cards your opponent might have

Think about what they could do to counter you, and play the least committal card(s) that still help you get your win condition.

When you're behind, you might need to take risks and hope your opponent doesn't have any answers to your cards. Think about whether you can still win without taking these risks, and remember you can't win every game.

Sometimes your opponent will have the perfect hand to beat you, but that's OK. Dust yourself off and move onto the next match. That's the nature of card games! 

If this guide was helpful, why not check out our dedicated page for Legends of Runeterra — we have lots of guides already out, with more coming very soon!

]]>
Legends of Runeterra Deck Archetypes: Aggro, Control, and Midrange https://www.gameskinny.com/h78u2/legends-of-runeterra-deck-archetypes-aggro-control-and-midrange https://www.gameskinny.com/h78u2/legends-of-runeterra-deck-archetypes-aggro-control-and-midrange Tue, 28 Apr 2020 11:57:08 -0400 Jonny Foster

It’s that time again! We’ve got another Legends of Runeterra (LoR) guide for you, this time on the Aggro, Midrange, and Control terms. This guide is aimed at beginners mainly, but check out our series of guides for some more advanced tips if you’re looking for help in your climb to Masters.

So, what do we mean by Aggro, Midrange, and Control? We’ll dive into each a little deeper and give you some pointers on how to play them below, but let’s start with simple definitions.

Aggro decks, as the name would suggest, are early-game aggressive decks. They try to win the game as quickly as possible, usually by dealing direct damage to the opponent’s Nexus and/or by swarming the board with cheap units and overpowering the opponent with wide attacks. 

Midrange decks are often medium-paced decks; they fight for board control and tend to play mana-efficient units each turn. Midrange decks usually win in a similar way to Aggro decks — by summoning lots of units, or creating a “wide board” — but they do so at a balanced speed instead of rushing to win in the early rounds. 

Finally, Control decks are usually the slowest of the three archetypes. They play lots of spells and effects that counter or interrupt an opponent’s gameplan, usually stalling until their win conditions are activated on turn 10 or later. 

These are pretty common Collectible Card Game(CCG) terms and by no means the only recognizable deck archetypes, but we’ll cover some other terms at the end of this guide. 

Now that we have that established, let’s look at some examples of each archetype and what their win conditions are. 

Aggro Decks and How to Play Them

Let’s start with an Aggro deck that’s been popular in LoR for months now: Spider Aggro

Aggro decks in LoR tend to play a mixture of burn and cheap swarm cards, and Spider Aggro is no exception, though it leans more towards the swarm gameplan.

House Spider is probably the best swarm card in the game, while Crowd Favourite is a big threat if it can be played on turn 4 or turn 5 with a wide board to increase its potency. 

This is the most common win condition for the deck, in fact. You want to play cheap units in the first 3-4 turns that are hard to block — such as Arachnoid Horror — or have added burn effects like Legion Saboteur, and then drop Crowd Favourite to help seal the deal. 

Brother’s Bond and Vision should be used to buff units that your opponent doesn’t choose to — or is unable to — block for surprise damage, while Decisive Maneuver combos brilliantly with Crowd Favourite to make the final push for damage.

Something to keep in mind with this Aggro deck, in particular, is that you shouldn’t waste your units by blocking on the turns when you’re defending

Not only does this maintain a wide board for Crowd Favourite’s maximum potential, but the damage potential of Saboteur and Horror are important to end the game quickly. You also don’t care about taking early damage to your own Nexus as you’re trying to kill your opponent as quickly as possible.

Let’s take a look at another Aggro deck: Discard Burn. This one focuses much more on direct burn damage through spells, though the early turns will play out pretty similarly. 

As before, we want to play cheap units that can deal early damage like Legion Saboteur and Boomcrew Rookie, often avoiding blocking so we can use their effects on multiple turns. 

Once we reach turns 3 and 4, however, we want to be playing Draven and Jinx to try and discard our hands, which will level the Jinx and lead to her generating copies of Super Mega Death Rocket!.

Get Excited! is a great card to help thin our hand while also dealing decent damage, and while you may sometimes need to use it to clear big threats, burn spells such as this and Mystic Shot are usually best spent on directly burning down our opponent's Nexus

This is probably the biggest mistake beginners make when playing Aggro decks. It’s very hard at first to ignore your opponent’s units and attacks to focus everything on direct damage, and while this isn’t always the best way to play, it will often be the difference between narrowly winning and losing close games

Midrange Decks and How to Play Them

Bannerman decks are the quintessential Midrange decks of Legends of Runeterra, so we’ll examine them first. 

We say “decks'' here because there are a few very similar versions of the deck running around. The primary focus is to play 37+ Demacian cards to have the best chance of enabling Vanguard Bannerman’s Allegiance ability, and the remaining cards can be selected from a few different regions.

These decks want to summon mana-efficient units each turn (Fleetfeather Tracker on turn 1, War Chefs on 2, Fiora on 3, and so on). They protect their units using Barrier spells to maintain a wide board and get the best use of Bannerman’s ability. 

In the later turns, they play Garen and Cithria the Bold together with Bannerman-buffed units to overwhelm your opponent. That’s it; the deck is pretty simple, as is the Midrange archetype in general, but it’s extremely effective when you stick to their gameplan. 

We’ll also briefly examine a Heimerdinger deck, which may not look like a typical Midrange list as the mana-curve is a little abnormal. The main reason for this is Heimerdinger’s unique ability, which enables us to summon lots of units when we play spells

The best-case scenario for this deck is to have Heimerdinger and multiple copies of Flash of Brilliance in hand on turn 5. This lets us create and summon multiple 3-Power Elusive units, while also generating big spells and replenishing our spell mana. 

Prismatic Barrier is another key 3-mana spell that can be used to protect Heimerdinger and create a valuable Elusive unit, while Succession doubles our unit output. 

Lux helps us fight for more board control as we reach late-game, too, as we can use Final Spark to help clear units off the board while we continue to swarm our field with free Heimerdinger turrets. 

The two Mageseeker cards are also good examples of typical Midrange cards, which provide a large amount of stats for their mana cost, but not much else. 

Control Decks and How to Play Them

As you may have noticed, Ezreal decks are incredibly powerful Control decks in Legends of Runeterra

Ezreal's leveling condition requires you play lots of spells and skills that target your opponent's units. By doing so, you draw out the game until Ezreal can finish the game with his leveled form. 

The general gameplan here is to whittle down your opponent's units by using cards like Mystic Shot and Statikk Shock, while also making use of the Brittle effect on Icevale ArcherHarsh Winds, and other spells to further hinder their combat options.

Ezreal is often not even played until you've targeted eight units, at which point you're looking to play cheap spells such as Rummage or the Mushroom Clouds created by Chump Whump to machine-gun your opponent's Nexus down with Ezreal's ability.

The other Control deck we'll look at is known as Spooky Karma, which combines Karma with cards from the Shadow Isles region. 

Shadow Isles has a lot of excellent tools for controlling the pace of the game and slowing down your opponent. These include damaging spells that also heal your Nexus — Withering Wail and Grasp of the Undying — as well as stall tools such as The Ruination and Frenzied Skitterer

Your gameplan here is to stall the game until turn 10 when Karma can be played to double up on the effectiveness of your Control spells. You don't have to worry about playing Karma early, either, as you have great ways of reviving her if your opponent can kill her, using The Rekindler and Mist's Call

Control decks often win by out-grinding their opponent's resources, and Spooky Karma is a great deck at doing just that.

It can be a little slow, though, and Control decks often have a higher skill floor than other archetypes as you need to know what you can and cannot afford to sacrifice in order to survive until turn 10.

Tempo, Combo, and Mill

Finally, let’s look at some fringe archetypes that don’t quite fall into the primary three categories. 

Tempo Decks

Tempo is often used to describe decks that are somewhere between Midrange and Control. They normally chug along with a reasonable mana-curve until they can swing with a big finisher in a few quick turns. Katarina is a good example of a card that usually works best in Tempo decks.

Combo Decks

Combo decks are usually a form of Control lists. They try to control the pace and drag the game out until they’ve assembled the combo pieces they need to end the game. Karma/Ezreal is a good example of this in LoR.

Mill Decks

Lastly, we have Mill, which isn’t an archetype that currently exists in LoR, but will do soon with the release of Maokai in Patch 1.0. Mill decks try and run your opponent out of cards or cause them to “deck out," which wins you the game instantly.

---

Hopefully, this guide helped you, but be sure to check out our dedicated page on Legends of Runeterra — we have lots of guides already out, with more on the way soon!

]]>
Legends of Runeterra Keywords: Attune, Deep, Plunder, Scout, Toss, Vulnerable https://www.gameskinny.com/iyyuh/legends-of-runeterra-keywords-attune-deep-plunder-scout-toss-vulnerable https://www.gameskinny.com/iyyuh/legends-of-runeterra-keywords-attune-deep-plunder-scout-toss-vulnerable Mon, 27 Apr 2020 16:52:44 -0400 Jonny Foster

Alongside the new Rising Tides Expansion, Riot has revealed a large number of new Keywords for their cards in Legends of Runeterra.

With so many new effects to learn, we've broken them all down for you below, including how to bed use them. Let's dive straight in!

Legends of Runeterra New Keyword Guide

Attune

We'll start with Attune, one of the simplest new keywords. Units with Attune refill one spell mana when they're summoned

It's interesting that this has been made into a keyword, as it's already an existing effect on Eager Apprentice.

Best Ways To Use Attune

Attune has pretty obvious synergy with spell-heavy decks. Playing a unit with Attune while you have 3 spell mana banked will be a waste, so you want to be casting spells (or not saving any mana between turns.) 

The pictured card, Coral Creatures, has good built-in synergy because it gives you a free spell and the mana to play it, but the random element might make it difficult to fit into a competitive deck. 

Deep

Next up is Deep, which is obvious support for the new Toss mechanic — more on that, later.  

Cards with the Deep keyword gain 3 Power and 3 Health once you've dropped below 15 cards remaining in your deck.

Best Ways To Use Deep

Deep is designed to work with Toss, so playing effects that remove cards from your deck will accelerate your Deep cards towards getting their buff.

This will likely be a fairly slow archetype, though, as getting down to 15 remaining cards will take quite a few turns even with Toss effects, so you're probably going to want to build around a Control shell that stalls out the game

Plunder

Plunder was the new keyword revealed by Riot alongside the upcoming Bilgewater Region. Cards with a Plunder effect will activate upon being played if you've damaged the enemy Nexus this round.

The wording here sounds very specific, so "play" doesn't refer to summoning effects, it's only when played from the hand. 

Best Ways To Use Plunder

We've only seen a few Plunder cards so far, from Freljord and the new Bilgewater region, but it's pretty obvious that they synergize well with spells and effects that can deal direct damage to the opponent's Nexus.

Examples include the newly revealed Ember Maiden, Warning Shot, and Noxian Fervor

You can also activate the Plunder effect after you've used combat to deal damage to the opponent's Nexus. The Overwhelm and Elusive keywords will be especially useful for this, as they're difficult to block without taking damage.  

Scout

Cards with the new Scout keyword will change combat as we know it. Once per roundif only Scout cards are attacking, you retain your attack token.

What this means is that you can essentially attack twice per turn if you have Scout units. There is a caveat, though: the Scout-only attack has to be before your regular attack.

Best Ways To Use Scout

As powerful as this sounds, it can be a double-edged sword. If your opponent has a few high-health blockers, your Scout-only attack might not be better than attacking with all of your units at once. 

The real Scout synergy here comes from Rally effects, such as Tianna Crownguard and Relentless Pursuit. The ideal sequence here would look like: 

  • Attack once with all (or most) of your units.
  • Play a Rally card.
  • Attack once with only your Scout units.
  • Attack a third time with everything.

Using your attacks in this order can force your opponent into trading away their blockers early in the turn, clearing the way for your Scout units to attack with less trouble, before your final big swing. 

As we saw in her reveal, Quinn synergizes perfectly with Scout units. Not only will she summon Valor every time she attacks, but other Scouts will probably be necessary in order to meet her leveling requirements. 

Toss

A card that has the new Toss keyword will Obliterate cards (except champions) from the bottom of your deck. 

Obliterate means the cards are completed destroyed, rather than just killed. This means they cannot be revived later using something like Kalista, and Last Breath effects won't trigger. 

Best Ways To Use Toss

So far, we've seen two reasons to use Toss cards: to synergize with the new Deep keyword and Nautilus or to try and end the game with Maokai. The leveled-up version of Maokai is a win condition in itself, and decks will be built entirely around this concept. 

Combining them will likely be overkill, however, as they're both late-game concepts that require some degree of stall and Control to survive until their win condition can be met.

We've also seen Treasure cards revealed with Nautilus, that have "When Tossed, draw me instead" text. These are powerful tools to add to a Toss deck but need to be created by other cards as they can't be crafted.  

Another card that has been revealed with the new set that has good synergy with Maokai is also Veteran Investigator. By saving this card until your Maokai has leveled up, you can force your opponent to run out of cards faster using Investigator's draw effect.

Vulnerable

A target that has been afflicted with the new Vulnerable keyword can be challenged by any unit, forcing it to block.

Essentially this means that any of your units will gain the Challenger keyword when attacking that specific unit.

Best Ways To Use Vulnerable

So far, one of the only cards we've seen with the Vulnerable keyword is Sejuani, who also Frostbites the target. This means it's perfect for taking down high-attack units for free. 

Of course, you can also use it to take down impactful units that your opponent might not want to block with, such as Boomcrew Rookie or Phantom Prankster

Another card we've seen with the Vulnerable keyword is Chum the Waters, which notably doesn't Frostbite the target. This has great synergy with followers that have the Last Breath keyword. Being able to crash your Cursed Keeper or The Undying into a specific enemy unit will be extremely useful. 

---

For more on Legends of Runeterra, check out our dedicated page for a range of useful guides aimed at all skill levels!

]]>
Legends of Runeterra Open Attack: What Is It and When to Use It https://www.gameskinny.com/a3y4j/legends-of-runeterra-open-attack-what-is-it-and-when-to-use-it https://www.gameskinny.com/a3y4j/legends-of-runeterra-open-attack-what-is-it-and-when-to-use-it Mon, 27 Apr 2020 16:17:22 -0400 Jonny Foster

Welcome to the second guide in our series of Legends of Runeterra (LoRguides. To recap: I’ve been playing CCGs for years, but I’ve recently hit Masters on the EUW ladder in Runeterra and want to help the community improve. Now, let’s jump into today’s topic: Open Attack.   

Much like my first guide on Initiative,  this guide is intended for intermediate players and beginners, but basic knowledge of the game mechanics is useful. 

Legends of Runeterra has something colloquially known as Open Attack, which is a pretty uncommon concept in other popular CCGs — again, just like the Initiative system, the closest comparison is actually Yu-Gi-Oh!.

Understanding Open Attack is vital to improving at the game, and it requires some advanced knowledge of LoR’s regions and meta decks, but it’s absolutely invaluable to climbing. 

To summarise, briefly: Open Attacking is the action of attacking at the start of your turn, before allowing your opponent the chance to respond to your board

In many other CCGs, attacking ends your turn, making this a pretty poor option if you have anything else in your hand that you could play. 

In LoR, however, you can still spend your mana to summon followers or cast spells after you’ve attacked. This opens up interesting possibilities to outplay your opponent and swing unfavorable matchups in your favor by denying their biggest threats. 

Let's dig in. 

Burst vs. Fast vs. Slow

To utilize Open Attack properly, we need to understand the difference between Slow, Fast, and Burst cards.

Burst and Fast are keywords unique to spell cards in LoR. Burst spells can’t be responded to immediately by your opponent, while Fast spells can only be replied to with Fast or Burst spells (within the same interaction). 

For the sake of discussing Open Attack, we’ll group these together when describing "Fast-speed threats." 

Slow spells can also be responded to with Fast or Burst spells, but they notably cannot be used during combat. They also cannot be used to respond to one of your opponent’s actions. For this reason, Skills generated from units are also considered as Slow-speed threats.

Do you see where we’re going with this?

You can deny some value of your opponent’s Slow-speed threats by attacking with the first action of your turn — or “Open Attacking”.

A good example of this is Arachnoid Sentry, a card that’s popular in Noxus/Ezreal and Noxus/Spider decks. When facing these decks, summoning a unit before attacking is risky, as your most valuable attackers are likely to be stunned. 

In other terms, your opponent is getting a positive trade by stunning one of your potential attackers, while also adding another blocker to the board. This heavily incentivizes you to Open Attack instead of summoning more units at the start of your turn. 

Similarly, Avalanche is a Slow spell that also punishes you for developing more units to the board. Figuring out what Slow threats your opponent might have is key to deciding whether you should Open Attack or not. 

If we examine Fast threats — such as Statikk Shock or Spirit's Refuge — these can threaten your gameplan before or during battle. Against decks that run these cards, therefore, it’s often better to summon additional units, as it creates extra threats for your opponent to worry about during combat.

Harsh Winds is a good example of a Burst-speed threat to watch out for against Freljord decks, too.

Other Factors & an Actionable Example

There are, of course, other reasons why Open Attacking may or may not be the ideal play; let's look at an example. 

In the game above, I'm playing Karma/Ezreal against a Karma/Thresh deck. They have 5 mana to spend, which will almost definitely be spent on a blocker if I decide to play more units. 

More importantly, however, I have a Chempunk Pickpocket on my field. Pickpocket's ability to steal spells is incredibly useful, so taking the chance to Open Attack here is always best.

My opponent is likely going to have to play Withering Wail if they want to stop my attack, which is an excellent trade for me as they can't heal their Nexus above 20, and it would leave me free to develop Karma and start generating free spells without fear of interruption.

The decision of whether or not to Open Attack should also be dictated by how many of their threats have already been used. In the example above, another threat that could stop my attack is Vile Feast.

My opponent had already played one copy of Vile Feast in an earlier turn, though, so playing around the possibility of them having a second copy that early into the game isn't really worth it.  

Vile Feast is also a Fast-speed threat, and Karma/Ezreal isn't a deck that wants to prioritize early damage, so all signs point towards an Open Attack being the ideal play for that example. 

Another key factor to consider is whether you’re ahead of your opponent or behind them in terms of your respective win conditions. This will be the topic of another of our upcoming guides, so be sure to check GameSkinny regularly for more LoR content

]]>
Legends of Runeterra Initiative Guide: What It Is, How It Works https://www.gameskinny.com/bfw4a/legends-of-runeterra-initiative-guide-what-it-is-how-it-works https://www.gameskinny.com/bfw4a/legends-of-runeterra-initiative-guide-what-it-is-how-it-works Mon, 27 Apr 2020 16:01:54 -0400 Jonny Foster

Welcome to our series of Legends of Runeterra guides that explores the ins and outs of Riot Games' F2P CCG. I’m a Master-tier player on the EUW ladder with a long history of playing card games. With that said, let’s jump into our first topic: the Initiative system.   

While this guide is intended for intermediate players and beginners, you should have ideally played through the in-game tutorials to understand the basic game flow. However, I will try to explain most of this topic in enough detail for beginners.

Legends of Runeterra (LoR) has something commonly referred to as Initiative, which functions very differently to other popular CCGs. It’s actually pretty similar to Yu-Gi-Oh!, my first love and the reason why I find LoR’s ruleset so appealing. Artifact also has a similar system, but that’s currently in the graveyard...

Initiative can be a little confusing because, like many CCG terms, it’s unofficial and therefore open to some degree of ambiguity. For the sake of clarity, what I’ll be referring to as Initiative is the way in which control passes back and forth between players in a turn

This can also be referred to as Order of Play.

Understanding Legends of Runeterra: Initiative Guide — What Is It and How Does it Work?

The basic functionality in LoR is that your opponent (effectively) has the opportunity to respond to anything you do, except a Burst spell.

What this means is that playing any card but a Burst spell will pass control over to your opponent.

Playing a Fast or Slow spell gives your opponent the chance to respond with their own spells. Playing a Follower or Champion lets your opponent play anything in their hand that they have sufficient mana for. 

When you attack, your opponent chooses what to block, and then control is passed back to you, allowing you to add any spells you want to the battle. The attack only connects once both players have passed without adding anything else to the combat — more on this, later. 

Now, there are some actions you can take that don’t allow an immediate response. These are summon effects from cards that don’t create a Skill, such as The Rekindler

By comparison, Rhasa the Sunderer has the Play keyword, which creates a Skill that can be interrupted or responded to. 

Of course, playing either is still summoning a Follower, which passes control to your opponent and allows them to summon their own cards or play their spells, so they are still getting a window to respond before you take any further actions.

With that out of the way, let’s focus on some special interactions and how to make use of them. 

Burst Spells and Passing

As we touched on earlier, Burst spells don’t pass control back to your opponent, so you can effectively make changes to your board state before they have a chance to respond. 

One cute way to capitalize on this is by summoning Jury-Rig after your opponent declares an attack. This lets you unexpectedly block something your opponent likely thought was going to deal free damage to your Nexus. 

Another useful Burst interaction is playing combat buffs like Elixir of Wrath on Zed before attacking, which will also buff the Living Shadow that he summons. This gives you two attackers with 5 Power, whereas you’d only buff Zed if you wait until the Living Shadow has been summoned before playing the Elixir.

There’s also a high-level tactic called Burst Passing, which can be used to gain some cheeky advantage. 

Essentially, playing a Burst spell and then passing puts the onus on your opponent to make the first move. In a regular turn, passing without taking an action would be risky as your opponent could pass back to end the turn. 

Burst Passing doesn’t obey these rules, however. Instead, if your opponent doesn’t play anything, their pass will give control back to you again without ending the turn

This may not sound important, but it can be a cunning way to scout for what cards your opponent may have, or bait them into using up their mana, leaving you with a free opportunity to play your cards unencumbered. 

Combat Tricks

Holding onto your spells is often a good idea when you’re on the offensive. For instance, committing to using Spirit’s Refuge before your opponent chooses their blockers is extremely risky, as it gives them information for free and gives them more opportunity to respond

Waiting until they’ve selected blockers before playing your Barrier spell can bait them into sub-optimal blocks, or force them to use their mana preemptively before they even know you have it.

On the flip side, you can use this to your advantage when you’re on defenseIf your opponent takes an odd attack — such as swinging their Karma into your board full of 5+ Power blockers — you know they’re probably looking to play a combat spell. 

In this situation, deciding not to block may be optimal. 

You’ll be trading 4+ Nexus health to deny them the chance to heal using Refuge during this turn, which could be vital to killing them before they’re able to snowball the late game with Karma. 

Another common position can be your opponent attacking with a Darkwater Scourge. Players are often waiting for you to block to make a Death Mark play in this situation. 

If you avoid blocking, their Scourge will die immediately after attacking, denying them the chance to play their combat trick. Of course, this is only a good idea if your opponent has 3+ mana remaining and is actually running Ionia in their deck.

Closing Tips on Initiative and More

Though there's more to Legends of Runeterra's Initiative system, this should be a good starting place to get you thinking about what your opponent can and cannot respond to.

This should guide your decisions moving forward, and always be on your mind when you consider which cards to play.

One related subject — Open Attack — will be receiving its own dedicated guide as its another very important topic that deserves a deeper dive. This will be released soon, so be sure to check back regularly for more helpful LoR tips!

---

For more guides on Legends of Runeterra, check out our dedicated page right here — we have lots more content on the way!

]]>
Trials of Mana ??? Seed Locations and Farming https://www.gameskinny.com/fjyf6/trials-of-mana-seed-locations-and-farming https://www.gameskinny.com/fjyf6/trials-of-mana-seed-locations-and-farming Mon, 27 Apr 2020 14:47:20 -0400 Ashley Shankle

Getting those third-tier classes in Trials of Mana isn't quite the headache it was in the original Super Famicom game, but it can be a runaround if luck isn't on your side.

But before we get into that: Be aware that this guide contains spoilers! Continue at your own risk!

Ready? 

Ok, with that out of the way, we can talk about when you can really start working towards your third classes (meaning your second class change). This means acquiring ??? Seeds, which you can plant and receive a random class change item for one of your party members.

Changing your class again opens up at Level 38, but you can't actually start getting ??? Seeds until you start on your task to take out the Benevodons.

In the original game, you had to farm a fair amount of enemies for a chance to receive ??? Seeds. These generally had a low drop chance, and there were no indicators as to which enemies dropped them.

In the Trials of Mana remake, you get one guaranteed ??? Seed per Benevodon dungeon and certain enemies do still drop them.

The caveat here is you can get duplicate class change items from seeds, so you won't necessarily go through all eight Benevodon dungeons and get the items you need for the exact classes you want. I know on my first playthrough, I received three of one of Angela's class items, and I didn't even want that one.

There is one area where I received much higher ??? Seed drops than the others, so I'll go into where to farm them after we look at the exact locations for the chests in the first seven Benevodon dungeons.

(Note: I forgot to take screenshots of two ??? Seed chests on my first playthrough, the shots will be added in the coming days during my second.)

??? Seed Chest Locations

Shimmering Ruins ??? Seed Location

Labyrinth of Ice ??? Seed Location

Chartmoon Tower ??? Seed Location

Fiery Gorge ??? Seed Location

Woods of Wandara ??? Seed Location

This area has no map, but the location of the chest in question can be seen above.

Ancient City Pedda

This isn't a dungeon, but there is one ??? Seed found in a chest in Ancient City Pedda, which is tied to the story. It's fairly easy to find, hence no picture.

Where to Farm ??? Seeds

In my first playthrough's worth of experience (this section may change), the best place to farm ??? Seeds early in your Benevodon hunt is the Fiery Gorge.

While some enemies in all of these dungeons have a chance to drop ??? Seeds, I got far more drops in the Fiery Gorge than the others before going for that eighth Benevodon. I ran through each dungeon twice, to try to determine enemy drops with little success.

I'll have to test which enemies drop them in the Fiery Gorge, as I was unable to pinpoint the exact enemies that dropped them. However, I stand by my experience of obtaining three times more ??? Seeds there than the other standard Benevodon dungeons, and recommend it be your first dungeon to tackle.

---

Are you enjoying the Trials of Mana remake? Sound off in the comments below, and let us know which monsters you've found are the best source of ??? Seed drops. I'll be updating my findings, as well as the two missing location screenshots, in the coming days and weeks.

[Note: The company, product, and system names shown here are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. This content contains copyrighted material owned by Square Enix Co., Ltd.  Re-publishing or distribution is prohibited. © 1995, 2019, 2020 SQUARE ENIX CO., LTD. All Rights Reserved.]

]]>
Overlord: Mass for the Dead Best Characters Tier List https://www.gameskinny.com/lpgaz/overlord-mass-for-the-dead-best-characters-tier-list https://www.gameskinny.com/lpgaz/overlord-mass-for-the-dead-best-characters-tier-list Mon, 27 Apr 2020 13:13:58 -0400 Sergey_3847

After many delays, the English version of Overlord: Mass for the Dead has finally been released on mobile devices. This turn-based battler has an impressive list of characters, which can intimidate even the most experienced player. This guide will make things easier for you by providing a tier list of the best characters.

Before building your party, take a look at the list below and compare character stats and abilities. You'll obviously want to focus on S-Tier characters, as they are the cream of the crop, but there are some other good characters to grab until you can get a full S-Tier roster. 

S-Tier Characters

Momonga

  • Attack: 6583
  • Defense: 2977
  • HP: 7747
  • Speed: 409

Momonga has the highest possible HP, attack power, and speed, making him the best overall Overlord character.

Momonga can easily play any role in any game mode, but of course, he serves best as an attacker due to his attack power. His Dark Wing skill can hit enemies up to three times, and each of these attacks consumes only 4 MP.

Adding to his usefulness, Momonga is also a good support character. Using Momonga's Aura of Despair skill can reduce an opponent's attack, defense, and speed — even if they have dark magic resistances.

Aura

  • Attack: 5766
  • Defense: 2626
  • HP: 6530
  • Speed: 373

Aura is another excellent attacker with almost as much power as Momonga. The difference is that all of Aura's skills are directed at offense, while Momonga has a few defensive tricks under his sleeve.

Aura's most powerful skill is Petrification Whip, which can instantly kill an enemy by petrifying them. Although it costs 5 MP, it's one of the most devastating attacks in the game.

Aura's Physical Strengthening skill increases her overall attack power. It's not as costly as Petrification Whip (costing only 2 MP), but it hits just as hard, albeit without the devastating petrification effect.

Aura is an excellent alternative to Momonga if you weren't able to get him during your first roll.

Mare

  • Attack: 3832
  • Defense: 2005
  • HP: 4879
  • Speed: 279

Healers are universally the most sought out characters in the game, and Mare is undoubtedly the best healer in Overlord: Mass for the Dead.

He is the only healer that has the ability to fully restore your party's HP. This skill becomes extremely valuable in multiplayer, where healing is just as important as your offensive and defensive strategies.

Mare can also serve as an additional attacker with the help of his Earth Dragon skill. However, he is still quite vulnerable, so invest in relics that can boost his HP and defense stats. Other than that, Mare is definitely a character you want in your roster for both PvE and PvP modes.

A-Tier Characters

Albedo

  • Attack: 5088
  • Defense: 3543
  • HP: 7671
  • Speed: 328

Albedo is the best tank in the game. With her massive HP and defense stats, Albedo is a character that can withstand a lot of damage. Her Mystery skill is exceptional when it comes to reducing enemy magic attacks and protecting the entire party from receiving damage. 

One of the most interesting abilities in Albedo's repertoire is her Reverse skill, which forces enemies to attack Albedo instead of any other party member. However, outside of the skill's 4-MP cost, Reverse nerfs Albedo's physical attack stat. But, in a dire situation, this can be a way out for your party.

Evil Eye

  • Attack: 6095
  • Defense: 2636
  • HP: 6730
  • Speed: 360

If you like the idea of healing all of your allies at once, then how about an attacker that can damage all enemies at once? Enter Evil Eye. 

Her Crystal Shot ability summons a massive, magic AoE effect that deals excruciating amounts of damage to all enemies. Only enemies with strong magic resistances will be able to withstand this type of attack.

Also, Evil Eye specializes in dealing with insect species, which is especially useful in the game's PvE mode. If you need to deal with a lot of insects, just use her Paralyze Insect skill.

Evil Eye's only drawback is her defense stat, which could be higher. But other than that, she's a top-notch AoE character, which every party should have.

Rem

  • Attack: 4599
  • Defense: 2913
  • HP: 6504
  • Speed: 348

Rem is another excellent healer, which has one advantage over Mare: Rem has a large defense stat, which gives her a much higher chance of surviving any battle. However, Mare is superior to Rem in healing skill, since Rem can heal only targeted allies, and she doesn't have the skill to heal all allies at once, unlike Mare.

Rem's attack stat is also quite low, which means that she can't take a very active part in battles outside of playing support. 

B-Tier Characters

Yardabaoto

  • Attack: 5489
  • Defense: 2853
  • HP: 6775
  • Speed: 328

Yardabaoto has a strong overall debuff ability, which reduces the collective power of all enemies, including their attack power, defense, and speed all at once. It's important to use this ability as early as possible so that your party can maneuver safely.

If enemies give you more trouble than usual, use this character's Sharp Claws ability to paralyze the targeted enemy. This opens up avenues for your attackers and magic casters.

In short, Yardabaoto is a great support character that can carry your party through some rough patches during both PvE and PvP matches.

Zero

  • Attack: 5103
  • Defense: 3280
  • HP: 7380
  • Speed: 312

Zero is a great alternative to Albedo. He has one of the highest HP and defense stats in the game, and his main Mystery skill is universally powerful.

He not only inflicts physical damage to a single enemy and increases his own physical attack and defense powers in the process, but he is also capable of increasing the chance of the critical hit and evasion rate.

His Myiogami skill is probably one of the best defense abilities of all, as it significantly reduces any damage taken from an enemy, which guarantees that Zero will stay on that battlefield longer than anybody else.

Clementine

  • Attack: 6056
  • Defense: 2585
  • HP: 6730
  • Speed: 370

Clementine is one of the fastest and most mobile characters in the game. More than that, she has a Crossfire skill that combines Fire and Thunder into a single devastating blow.

Her second skill, Amplification, increases the damage for both of these elements, which makes them even more brutal. Taking into account her rather high base attack stat, you can imagine how hard she can hit.

All this, in combination with her agility, makes Clementine a very strong character for almost any type of party and strategy.

---

That's it for the best characters tier list in Overlord: Mass For the Dead, and be sure to come back soon for more related guides on GameSkinny.

]]>
Animal Crossing New Horizons: Tool Durability & How to Get Golden Tools https://www.gameskinny.com/11zim/animal-crossing-new-horizons-tool-durability-how-to-get-golden-tools https://www.gameskinny.com/11zim/animal-crossing-new-horizons-tool-durability-how-to-get-golden-tools Fri, 24 Apr 2020 14:01:00 -0400 Ashley Shankle

Once you've played Animal Crossing: New Horizons enough, you start to wonder just how long your tools really last and when you can get access to Golden tools to make island life a little less tedious.

Every primary tool type has a set amount of durability, meaning it can only be used a certain amount of times before it breaks and you have to replace it. Golden varieties of these tools last a significantly longer amount of time, at the cost of your time to craft them, as well as a Gold Nugget.

In this guide, we're going to list out the durability (uses) for each tool's variants, as well as how you can obtain the recipe for the coveted Golden version. As you might expect, getting your hands on these recipes is a time-intensive effort and you will likely be trying to get some of them for months.

It's worth noting that the Ladder and Vaulting Pole, two very important tools to have on-hand, will last forever and never break. Just don't throw them away, lest you get stuck and have to craft new ones!

Animal Crossing New Horizons: Tool Durability & How to Get Golden Tools

Tool Variants

Once Nook's Cranny gets its first upgrade, you are able to buy tools that are equal in durability to the basic upgraded tools. So an Outdoorsy Shovel or Outdoorsy Net will last the same amount of time as a regular Shovel or Net.

Worth keeping in mind, though they are a bit pricey at 2,500 Bells.

New Horizons Shovels
  • Flimsy Shovel — 40 uses
  • Golden Shovel — 200 uses
  • All other Shovels — 100 uses

How to Get the Golden Shovel

You can get the Golden Shovel recipe by helping Gulliver 30 times, after which the recipe will be mailed to you. It requires a Shovel and 1 Gold Nugget to craft.

New Horizons Fishing Rods
  • Flimsy Fishing Rod — 10 uses
  • Gold Fishing Rod — 90 uses
  • All other Fishing Rods — 30 uses

How to Get the Golden Fishing Rod

You can get the Golden Fishing Rod recipe by catching every type of fish, after which the recipe will be mailed to you. It requires a Fishing Rod and 1 Gold Nugget to craft.

New Horizons Nets
  • Flimsy Net — 10 uses
  • Golden Net  — 90 uses
  • All other Nets — 30 uses

How to Get the Golden Net

You can get the Golden Net recipe by catching every type of bug, after which the recipe will be mailed to you. It requires a Net and 1 Gold Nugget to craft.

New Horizons Axes
  • Flimsy Axe — 40 uses
  • Golden Axe — 200 uses
  • Stone Axe — 100 uses
  • Axe — 100 uses

How to Get the Golden Axe

You can get the Golden Axe recipe by breaking a total of 100 Axes, after which the recipe will be mailed to you. It requires an Axe and 1 Gold Nugget to craft.

The Golden Axe functions like the Axe and not the Stone Axe, meaning it will chop down trees after three hits.

New Horizons Watering Cans
  • Flimsy Watering Can — 20 uses
  • Golden Watering Can — 180 uses
  • All other Watering Cans — 60 uses

How to Get the Golden Watering Can

You can get the Golden Watering Can by receiving a 5-star rating for your island at Isabelle. It requires a Watering Can and 1 Gold Nugget to craft.

New Horizons Slingshots
  • Slingshot 20 uses
  • Golden Slingshot — 60 uses
  • All other Slingshots — 20 uses

How to get the Golden Slingshot

You can get the Golden Slingshot recipe by popping 300 balloons, after which a golden balloon will spawn. Pop it, and it will drop the recipe. It requires a Slingshot and 1 Gold Nugget to craft.

---

Check out our other Animal Crossing: New Horizons guides and other content. You won't regret it!

]]>
Destiny 2 Guardian Games Laurel Farming Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/8op4n/destiny-2-guardian-games-laurel-farming-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/8op4n/destiny-2-guardian-games-laurel-farming-guide Fri, 24 Apr 2020 11:13:06 -0400 John Schutt

Laurels are a new consumable unique to Destiny 2's latest community event, the Guardian Games. If you want your class to win it all in a little under a month, you'll need to collect lots and lots of Destiny 2 Laurels. That means farming — lots and lots of farming.

This guide shows you the best way to farm Laurels so you can complete bounties, medals, and other objectives and put your class at the top of the Games.

Destiny 2 Laurels Farming: The Best Place to Get Them

If you have a bounty, medal, or other objective asking you to collect Laurels, odds are the different kinds have a different point value: the ones for your class are probably worth 3 points; other classes are worth 1 point. Maximizing your gains is essential, and there are a few places to do that really, really well.

Farming Destiny 2 Laurels Method 1: Repeating Lost Sectors

It's a tale as old as Destiny 2. You want easy farms, do Lost Sectors over and over. Ideally, you want something you can get to quickly and do just as fast. More importantly, you want a lot of enemies in a small space, so you don't waste any kills. 

The best Lost Sectors in the game for enemy density are:

  • Kingship Dock in Thieves Landing on the Tangled Shore
  • The Orrery in Artifact's Edge on Nessus
  • Core Terminus in Braytech Futurescape on Mars

These three Sectors come with the added benefit of easy-to-access and frequently-respawning Public Event flags you can use to recharge your Super, the best ability for Laurel farming. 

The basic pattern goes like this: Travel to the destination of your choice and pick up a flag to refill your abilities. Run the Lost Sector. Travel to another flag. Repeat the process until you have all the Laurels you could ever want.

Farming Destiny 2 Laurels Method 2: Strikes and Gambit

If you want to multitask while farming Laurels, I recommend doing Strikes and, to a lesser extent, Gambit. You'll be able to get your hands on Pinnacle rewards, and there are plenty of opportunities in both to gobble up large amounts of Laurels. 

Strikes are preferable for a couple of reasons. First, you won't be waylaid by invading players, and Strike enemies tend not to hit nearly as hard, especially compared to Gambit Prime.

Strikes are a much more chill experience altogether, too, and go by quicker even if your team is made of randoms who only know a couple of mechanics. Frustration is the enemy of farming, after all.



Farming Destiny 2 Laurels Method 3: Run Escalation Protocol

Many players have already settled on the Mars activity Escalation Protocol as their Laurel farming grind of choice. Specifically, the first few levels are the best, as the enemies are plentiful and easy to kill.

That said, even later levels are worthwhile, though you'll have to work harder for your Laurels, as the enemies have more health and deal much more damage. Bosses are a bigger hassle to deal with later on as well.

The last disadvantage to Escalation Protocol is the competition you'll be facing against other players in the server. If there's even one Guardian of another class, you'll be handicapped by their less valuable Laurels. It's probably not the biggest deal, but something to be aware of.

A few hangups don't take this activity off the farming table, of course. It's still a highly efficient and enjoyable horde mode. The Level 7 armor isn't bad looking either, though getting a good roll is a hassle and a half.

Best Classes and Abilities to Farm Laurels

The class you use for farming the most Laurels will depend on which one you want to win the Guardian Games with. All classes have good options for killing masses of enemies at once, but certain abilities are just better than others at mob clearing.

Warlock Farming Class: Attunement of Conduction

When it comes to clearing, I don't think anything beats top-tree Stormcaller. First and foremost is Arc Web, the ability to chain damage from your grenade between nearby enemies. A single Pulse grenade is great, but if it can affect a whole room full of trash mobs, all the better.

Second, its ability to boost Super time and survivability when you cast it with full grenade and melee charges. More time in-Super, more Laurels made.

Pair this Super with the Crown of Tempests Exotic helmet, and you'll be shooting lightning from your fingers for longer than Emperor Palpatine would like.

Hunter Farming Class: Way of the Warrior

Arc energy wins again with the Way of the Warrior Hunter subclass. There are a few reasons, first among them is the subclass's ability to chain effectively infinitely-charged melee attacks, so long as you have enemies around you and a charged Dodge ability. That last bit is pretty easy because melee kills recharge the dodge and vice versa. 

Second: the Liar's Handshake Exotic gauntlets. Their Cross-Counter ability is a fast follow up attack that also heals you, upping your survivability.

The third ability at play here is Lethal Current, which ups your damage after dodging in-Super. This is handy to have if you run into a tougher enemy than you were expecting, and you need some extra oomph to take them down.

Titan Farming Class: Code of the Juggernaut

Arc wins all three farming classes, thanks again to an Exotic and perk-Super combination. Code of the Juggernaut has been the bane of Crucible since at least Forsaken launch. It's never been a slouch at PvE content either and now is no different.

There's almost no other Super in the game that lasts as long or can deal as much damage as Fist of Havoc in bottom-tree Striker. You can and will eliminate everything within a half-mile radius.

Add in the Insurmountable Skullfort Exotic helmet, and even if you don't have your Super active, you'll have infinite melee attacks. 

---

Those are the most accessible, easiest-to-reach Destiny 2 Laurel farming areas and best farming classes right now. As the Guardian Games progress, different temporary solutions will make themselves known. Still, the options above aren't going anywhere anytime soon and take no time to set up or consistently complete.

Check out all our Destiny 2 content from the Guardian Games and beyond.

]]>
Destiny 2 Void Feast Bounty Guide: How to Complete It https://www.gameskinny.com/t65ye/destiny-2-void-feast-bounty-guide-how-to-complete-it https://www.gameskinny.com/t65ye/destiny-2-void-feast-bounty-guide-how-to-complete-it Fri, 24 Apr 2020 10:29:58 -0400 John Schutt

Bounties play a big part in your Destiny 2 Guardian Games experience in, and some of them are tougher to complete than they probably should be. One such bounty, Void Feast for Warlocks, is causing a bit of a stir. 

What the bounty asks of you and what you have to do are a little bit at odds. This guide will tell you how and where to complete the bounty fast.

Note: In the "This Week at Bungie" article for the week of 4/25, Bungie noted that they are aware of the issue with Void Feast and the Devour ability. Hopefully, a fix will be released soon.

How to Complete the Destiny 2 Warlock Void Feast Bounty

Once you pick up the Void Feast bounty from Eva, you'll note it says you need to defeat 10 enemies with Devour twice. What is doesn't specify is what part of the Devour ability you need to defeat enemies with.

For those unsure how to activate Devour, you'll be using the bottom tree in the Void Warlock subclass, Attunement of Hunger. 

Devour is the first ability you unlock in this tree, keyed to your melee attack. You'll activate the ability if it has a charge, and you kill an enemy with said melee. You'll later unlock the additional ability to consume your grenade charge to activate Devour. 

You would be forgiven for believing that all you need to do is defeat 10 enemies quickly two times to complete Void Feast. Nope. It's more complicated than that, but understand that this isn't because of some bug Bungie didn't squash. Blame the writing here, because it's clear as mud.

What you actually have to do is: activate the Devour ability by defeating 10 enemies with a charged melee attack between two different lives. Yes, you have to die between each streak, but you can't die during the streak, or it resets. 

The Best Way to Complete the Destiny 2 Void Feast Bounty

Lost Sectors are your best friend for completing this and almost any other bounty that asks you to get a certain number of kills in a certain way. Your best bets are:

  • Kingship Dock in Thieves Landing on the Tangled Shore
  • The Orrery in Artifact's Edge on Nessus
  • Core Terminus in Braytech Futurescape on Mars
  • Any Trostland Lost Sector on the EDZ

Escalation Protocol is also a great option, though farming the enemies you need could be a little harder if you're competing with other players for kills, and the risk fo death is significantly higher.

Best Void Feast Farming Loadout

The following loadout is ideal for completing the Void Feast bounty:

  • Use the Monte Carlo Exotic auto rifle and Claws of a Dire Ahamkara Exotic gloves. Kills with the Monte Carlo recharge your melee ability. The Claws give you two melee charges before you need to re-up. 

If you don't have one or either of those exotics, the following strategy applies:

  • Maximize your Strength stat, as it's what governs how fast your melee recharges. 
  • Use the Nezarec's Sin exotic, which decreases your ability cooldown for every Void kill you get, weapon or ability. 
  • If you just want to always have a melee charge, head to either The EDZ or Nessus and move between Public Event flags, recharging whenever you're out. It's not efficient, necessarily, but if your load times are short, it might still be faster than waiting for your melee to recharge.

Regardless of how you go about it, as long as you can string together 10 Devour-activating melee kills without dying, twice, you'll complete this bounty in no time.

Check out our other Destiny 2 guides and keep our guides hub ready. More Guardian Games content is on the way.

]]>
Destiny 2 Guardian Games Medals Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/depdn/destiny-2-guardian-games-medals-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/depdn/destiny-2-guardian-games-medals-guide Fri, 24 Apr 2020 10:17:10 -0400 John Schutt

Destiny 2 Guardian Games Medals are a new reward structure in the current seasonal event. You'll be competing against your fellow Guardians to farm and deposit as many medals as you can while repping your favorite Guardian class in the Guardian Games: Warlock, Titan, or Hunter.

How do you earn medals, and what kind of rewards do they offer? And most of all, what's the best way to farm them? This guide has everything you need to know.

Destiny 2: Guardian Games Medals Guide

Earning Medals and Rewards

The Guardian Games vendor Eva Levantethere will offer six medals for you to complete every day. Medals come in Gold, Silver, and Bronze. To get them, you must play in certain locations or in certain game modes. 

The objective you must complete for each medal will be easier or more difficult depending on the kind of medal you're farming. Gold takes more time and effort than Silver, which is more demanding than Bronze. For instance, medals geared toward Destination activities look something like this: 

  • Bronze: Defeat 75 enemies on any of the planets or locations in the game. It doesn't matter if they're difficult, bosses, or just red bar mobs: one kill is one tick on the bar. Be aware that some activities do not count toward this medal, specifically Raids, Strikes, and quests.
  • Silver Collect: Get 500 points worth of Laurels on any destination. Laurels created by you or other players using your current class are worth 3 points, other class Laurels are worth 1 point.
  • Gold: Defeat 300 enemies on any destination, meaning you're likely to complete the silver objective first.

There are also medal sets for Crucible, Gambit, and Strikes. As with Destination medals, the medal will spell out what you need to do to earn it. 

Lastly, there's a Gold Medal for completing bounties of any kind. Weekly bounties, in this case, are worth 4 points, Dailies are worth 2 points, and repeatables are worth 1 point. Accrue 10 total points and you can turn in the Bounties medal.

Once you complete a medal, you won't be able to simply click on it and complete it. You need to return to the Tower and deposit it into the Guardian Games Monument

***Be aware: you'll deposit all your completed medals at once, so make sure you have enough room in your inventory and Postmaster to hold all the loot.***

 

Guardian Games Medals Rewards

Speaking of loot, the quality of loot you receive per medal is also based on the kind of medal you deposit. A Bronze medal gives lower quality rewards than Silver, which is less rewarding than Gold.

Here's a breakdown of what you'll be receiving for each Medal you turn in:

  • Bronze Medals: A piece of random blue gear and some glimmer.
  • Silver Medals: A chance at random piece of purple Legendary gear, possibly a random piece of blue gear, and glimmer.
  • Gold Medals: A random piece of purple Legendary gear, upgrade materials (Enhancement Cores, Upgrade Modules, etc.), and some glimmer

All medals offer you a means to improve, either with good stat rolls, upgrade materials, or just some extra glimmer and Gunsmith Parts for use elsewhere.

There are two much bigger incentives for turning in medals, though.

First, once you complete and deposit enough of them, your character will receive a piece of Pinnacle Gear: this gear goes above the soft Power cap of 1,000, to a maximum of 1010 base Power before factoring in your Artifact bonus. 

Each medal has a point value — Gold is 4, Silver is 2, Bronze is 1 — and you'll need to accrue 25 points total for the Pinnacle reward. That will take you three days to accomplish regardless of how fast you complete medal objectives.

The second reward is more tangible. As part of your Guardian Games registration, you got your hands on a class item specifically for the event, and the winner of each the Games will forever be immortalized with a shiny Gold version of that gear piece. 

Plus, every day, the item will update with your class's current standings, as will the Games monument itself. If you want the shiniest, gold-est Hunter cape, Titan mark, or Warlock bond to show off, you'll need to do your part to put your class at the top of the leaderboards.

Those are the essential facts around Medals. Check out our other Destiny 2 guides on the Guardian Games and beyond:

]]>
Stranded Deep Guide: How to Get Lashing https://www.gameskinny.com/2llnd/stranded-deep-guide-how-to-get-lashing https://www.gameskinny.com/2llnd/stranded-deep-guide-how-to-get-lashing Thu, 23 Apr 2020 15:45:45 -0400 Sergey_3847

Stranded Deep lashing is used in almost every one of the game's recipes, whether it's a building or a tool. Consequently, you will need to craft as many lashings as possible during your playthrough (even if you're trying to cure poison).

This Stranded Deep guide will show you where to find lashing materials and how to craft lashings.

How to Get Lashing in Stranded Deep

1. Craft a Stone Tool

Before attempting to craft lashings, you will need a cutting tool. Something as simple as a stone tool or a stone knife will work.

To craft a stone tool, you must find a simple stone lying anywhere on the ground, pick it up, and use it in your crafting menu to create a stone tool.

2. Cut a Small Palm Tree

Small palm sapling and yucca trees can be found almost anywhere in the wild of Stranded Deep. Palm saplings look like very small spikey bushes (about a foot or two tall), while yucca trees look like tall spears with palm fronds sticking out (about six feet tall).

It will take a single chop to harvest a small palm sapling, while it will take about 10 chops with a stone tool to get the fibrous leaves from a yucca tree. 

Pick up at four leaves to craft one lashing.

3. Craft Lashing

After you've picked up four fibrous leaves, use them in your crafting menu to create one lashing. If you need more lashings, then cut more palm trees and collect more leaves. Rinse and repeat.

---

For more on the survival game, be sure to check out some of our other guides:

Check out our growing collection of Stranded Deep guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Animal Crossing Redd Guide: How to Find and Buy Art From Redd https://www.gameskinny.com/du1nv/animal-crossing-redd-guide-how-to-find-and-buy-art-from-redd https://www.gameskinny.com/du1nv/animal-crossing-redd-guide-how-to-find-and-buy-art-from-redd Thu, 23 Apr 2020 15:21:46 -0400 Joshua Broadwell

The Animal Crossing 1.12 update brings Jolly Redd to New Horizons, among other things. But the big question for many right now is: when does Redd show up in ACNH? That's followed closely by how to buy art. Luckily for you, we've got the answers. 

Our Animal Crossing Redd guide breaks down what you need to do to get Redd to visit and how to buy art once he gets to your New Horizons island.

Animal Crossing Redd Guide: How to Get Redd to Show Up, Buy Art

Getting Redd to Visit and Upgrading the Museum

The first thing you'll need to do is download the Animal Crossing 1.12 update if you haven't already. Then, fire up New Horizons and head to your museum (depending on where it's located, you may or may not encounter another new face on the way).

Speak to Blathers, and he'll let you know he's expanding the Museum to include an art gallery. He mentions it's due to your hard work and donations, but it doesn't seem like there's any kind of donation requirement to meet for Blathers to expand the Museum.

After that, you'll have to wait at least one day. Time travelers are reporting Redd's Trawler stops by the day after Blathers tells you about the gallery, but some others say it's random.

We'll update when we know for sure, but either way, Isabelle will let you know in the announcements that a suspicious character is wandering around the island.

That's Redd. Find him and chat with him to get your first piece of art, which you can then take to Blathers. It's guaranteed to be legitimate, and it kicks off the Museum's big expansion as advertised in the 1.12 update trailer.

Blathers will close the Museum the next day for renovations, and the day after that, Redd comes back to town. Isabelle won't announce him, but he'll be wandering around town like before. Chat him up, and he'll eventually bring you back to the Treasure Trawler.

Buying Art from Redd

After the first visit, Redd will routinely come around like all the other tourist NPCs. Unlike other NPCs, though, he visits via boat, and it'll dock just offshore near your secret beach.

Head on board with Bells in hand, and you'll get the option to purchase some artwork of suspect origins from the wily fox.

Series veterans already know this, but a good chunk of what you get off Redd is counterfeit. There is a way to tell the difference between a fake and real piece of art, though, as the fake art always has something wrong with it — coffee stains, add-ons like a towel, discolorations, and so on.

Needless to say, you can't donate fake art, so it's best to try and make sure you get the genuine article.

---

That's all you need to know about getting Redd to show up in ACNH and how to buy art from Redd. Be sure to check out our Animal Crossing: New Horizons guide collection for more tips, including:

 

]]>
How to Change Camera Angle in Madden 20 https://www.gameskinny.com/2uxom/how-to-change-camera-angle-in-madden-20 https://www.gameskinny.com/2uxom/how-to-change-camera-angle-in-madden-20 Thu, 23 Apr 2020 15:03:23 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Just like almost every entry before it, Madden 20 lets you change the camera angle for a better look at the action. If you're a field general, there's a chance you'll want to see the defense from multiple angles. Or, perhaps, you'd rather be up high like the SkyCam or closer to the line of scrimmage. 

Regardless of the reason, changing the camera angle in Madden 20 is super simple. 

Madden 20 Camera Angle: How to Change It

You can change the height and position of the default camera by using the D-pad. From the starting camera angle, you can: 

  • Press up to get the closest view
  • Press down to get a higher, wider view
  • Press down again to get the highest, widest view
  • Press down yet again to get an angled side view

You cannot cycle through the camera angles from the very bottom and the very top from pressing down or up respectively. You must cycle through all five of them individually. 

You also cannot switch camera angles once the ball is snapped. Though four of the five camera angles are very similar, each is different enough to throw you off your game if you haven't practiced with them (especially the side-view angle). 

---

That's all you need to know about how to change camera angle in Madden 20. For more on perennial football franchise, be sure to check out our other Madden 20 guides, as well as our review

]]>
Stranded Deep: How to Cure Poison https://www.gameskinny.com/iie4m/stranded-deep-how-to-cure-poison https://www.gameskinny.com/iie4m/stranded-deep-how-to-cure-poison Thu, 23 Apr 2020 12:55:26 -0400 Sergey_3847

Figuring out how to cure poison in Stranded Deep can be difficult, especially in the early game. If you don't know how to make the antidote, getting bitten by snakes and sea snakes or stepping on a sea urchin, for example, can quickly kill you. That's why we're here to tell you how to get "unpoisoned." 

First, we'll cover the sources of poison in the game, and then the steps you need to follow in order to craft an antidote. 

How to Cure Poison in Stranded Deep

Animals that Will Poison You

Luckily, there are no plants that will poison you in Stranded Deep. However, there are five animals that will. These include: 

  • Snake
  • Lionfish
  • Sea Snake
  • Sea Urchin
  • Crown of Thorns Starfish

Of the five animals, only the snake and the lionfish can be killed. The sea snake, the sea urchin, and the crown of thorns starfish cannot be killed. 

How to Craft a Poison Cure (Antidote)

1. Level Up Your Crafting

Before you can craft an antidote, you need to level up your crafting skill to Level 3. That is why it's so important not to get poisoned early; if you don't reach Level 3 in crafting, you will never be able to get rid of poison.

You can level up your crafting by making simple tools, such as the crude ax or crude hoe. Even crafting the stone tool and lashings will work. You can learn how to craft both in this guide.

2. Craft a Coconut Flask

Once your crafting skill has reached Level 3, you can start searching for coconuts to craft a coconut flask. Coconuts are easy to find lying under mature coconut trees, or you can knock them down if you have a crude bow, for example. 

To craft a Coconut Flask you need:

  • 1x coconut (fresh, not used)
  • 1x lashing

Use your crafting menu to combine these materials. 

3. Find a Pipi Plant

Now that you have a coconut flask, it's time to harvest some Pipi plants. Pipi plants are very rare but they are the only plant in the game that can cure poison.

You can find Pipi plants on islands with giant rocks. Unfortunately, these islands are also inhabited by poisonous snakes, so be careful while searching for the plants. You can find them growing in small patches along the shorelines

Eventually, you can farm Pipi plants so that you have a steady supply of antidote. To farm, you must first craft a crude hoe, then use 4 wood sticks and 1 lashing to create a farm plot. 

4. Craft the Poison Antidote

Once you have all the necessary materials, you can craft an Antidote using this recipe:

  • 2x Pipi plant
  • 1x Coconut Flask

Consume the antidote as soon as you get poisoned, and it will be gone for good. Or until you get poisoned again. 

---

That is all you need to know on how to cure poison in Stranded Deep. There's plenty else to know, though:

Check out our growing collection of Stranded Deep guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Animal Crossing Shrubs Guide: Kinds and Where to Get Them https://www.gameskinny.com/rf6x3/animal-crossing-shrubs-guide-kinds-and-where-to-get-them https://www.gameskinny.com/rf6x3/animal-crossing-shrubs-guide-kinds-and-where-to-get-them Thu, 23 Apr 2020 12:25:31 -0400 Joshua Broadwell

Animal Crossing shrubs are making a comeback thanks to New Horizons' 1.2 update. Leif the happy sloth is back, peddling hard-to-find flowers and flowering shrubs. It's not just for the Nature Day celebration running through early May either; it's the only way you can get bushes in Animal Crossing.

Our Animal Crossing shrubs guide breaks down when Leif comes to town and what each type of shrub available is in Animal Crossing: New Horizons.

Animal Crossing: New Horizons Shrubs Guide

When and Where Leif Visits

Leif comes to your island the same as any other wandering tourist like Sahara or Kicks. It seems like he's available today for everyone, in honor of Nature Day and the new update. We don't know if he'll be around tomorrow too, or if he disappears after the event is over.

If we had to guess, based on previous games, we'd wager Leif probably sets up shop with the Nooklings again after a while. We'll update when we know for sure, though.

When he is in town, Leif will set up in front of Resident Services at the start of each day (5 a.m.) and stay there until 4:59 a.m. the following morning. The main attraction is, of course, the variety of flowering shrubs he sells for 280 Bells apiece, but he also offers rarer flowers like cosmos and mums.

On top of that, he'll buy your weeds for double the Nooklings' price — 20 Bells per bundle.

Animal Crossing Shrubs: Varieties and Bloom Season

Leif mentions his special offer today is the azalea shrub, which is also in season. Unfortunately, he doesn't say what the bloom seasons are for the other shrubs he sells, but that's where we come in.

Here are all the Animal Crossing bushes you can get and when they bloom. Note that these are all the ones we know of for now, though Nintendo could add more in future updates as well.

Spring Bushes

  • Pink Azalea
  • White Azalea

Summer Bushes

  • Red Hibiscus
  • Yellow Hibiscus
  • Blue Hydrangea
  • Pink Hydrangea

Fall Bushes

  • Orange Tea Olive
  • Yellow Tea Olive

Winter Bushes

  • Pink Camellia
  • Red Camellia
  • Holly

You can still buy and plant shrubs out of season. They just won't have any flowers (or berries, in holly's case) until their season arrives.

Once you've got your desired shrub, you can plant it the same as you would any other flower. We don't yet know whether there's any kind of cross-breeding you can do with shrubs, so watering may or may not be something you want to do.

And as always, it's best to dig holes for where you want to plant each bush, just so you have better control over where they end up.

Finally, you'll get some extra Nook Miles for planting shrubs: a big Nook Miles+ bonus in honor of Nature Day and then a regular series of Nook Miles bonuses for planting a set number of bushes.

---

That's everything you need to know about Animal Crossing shrubs and how to get them. Be sure to check out our other Animal Crossing: New Horizons guides for more tips and tricks, including:

]]>
Madden 20 Pump Fake: How to do It on PS4, Xbox One, PC https://www.gameskinny.com/6dj7x/madden-20-pump-fake-how-to-do-it-on-ps4-xbox-one-pc https://www.gameskinny.com/6dj7x/madden-20-pump-fake-how-to-do-it-on-ps4-xbox-one-pc Thu, 23 Apr 2020 11:52:00 -0400 Jonathan Moore

The Madden 20 pump fake. Decent for getting defenses to bite one way before burning them deep the other. It's one of the many intangible weapons in your offensive arsenal, and it can lead to big scores and even bigger wins if used correctly. But how do you pump fake in Madden 20 on PS4, Xbox One, and PC? 

It's really rather simple. 

Madden 20 Pump Fake: How to do It 

You pump fake by double-tapping the button for the receiver you want the defense to bite on. This will bait the defense toward the receiver, opening up another receiver to actually catch the ball. 

The pump fake can be fickle, too. Sometimes you will pump fake and be able to throw to the intended receiver immediately; sometimes, you won't. The input just doesn't seem to register. There's also the risk of double-pumping if you mash the button for the intended receiver too soon after the initial press, which completely throws off the timing of any play. 

Best Routes for the Pump Fake

The fade route is a great way to use pump fake in Madden 20.

The pump fake is best used on a hitch-and-go or any double-move play. It also works well with a deep fade route that gives the receiver enough room along the sideline to create separation. Post routes can also work depending on the defense, as can routes across the middle, though to varying success. 

For most routes, it's best to pump fake early, so your target receiver can put distance between him and the defender. For hitch-and-go and double-move routes, it's best to pump fake when the receiver makes his cut, which typically draws in the whole field. 

Remember that everything constricts on a shorter field, making the pump fake even less useful for longer routes over the 50 and closer to the endzone. 

Best Defense for the Pump Fake

Ideally, the pump fake is best used against deeper zone coverages, such as Cover 3 Match or Cover 4 Palms, where you can bait a defender inside or off double coverage. Using it against man-to-man coverage is difficult at best; the AI secondary doesn't seem to take the bait too often. 

However, though the pump fake can occasionally fool the secondary, it still takes valuable time to pull off. Just as you would be for a play-action pass, be wary of the pass rush when pump faking to avoid a sack. 

QB Superstar Ability: Sleight of Hand

Several Madden 20 QBs have the Sleight of Hand Superstar ability. This gives them a "higher chance of success on pump fakes & double moves." In the Franchise and Exhibition modes, Ben Roethlisberger (Pittsburgh Steelers) is the only player that has Sleight of Hand. 

In MUT, you can get various QBs with the ability, such as Patrick Mahomes. 

---

That's it on the Madden 20 pump fake. For more on the latest entry in the EA football franchise, be sure to check out our other Madden 20 guides, as well as our review

]]>
Persona 5 Kaneshiro Will Seeds Locations https://www.gameskinny.com/5wn88/persona-5-kaneshiro-will-seeds-locations https://www.gameskinny.com/5wn88/persona-5-kaneshiro-will-seeds-locations Wed, 22 Apr 2020 23:30:02 -0400 Joshua Broadwell

Persona 5 Kaneshiro Will Seeds are, like other Persona 5 Will Seeds, collectible items hidden away in each Palace. You can eventually transform them into invaluable accessories. 

The key here is that they are "hidden." Like other Will Seeds, some Kaneshiro Will Seeds are off the beaten path and require you to look around for specific grappling hook points. It's why we've put together this Persona 5 Kaneshiro Will Seeds guide to help you out.

Persona 5 Kaneshiro Will Seeds Locations

Red Kaneshiro Will Seed

The red Kaneshiro Will Seed is near the hallway with the massive vault that requires two keys to open. If you're facing the vault door, turn right, and head down the hallway.

Morgana will mention he senses something. Turn around, and pan the camera up a bit. You'll notice a grappling hook point. Swing up to the next floor, and follow the hallway around until you reach the door guarding the Will Seed. 

Blue Kaneshiro Will Seed

Kaneshiro's blue Will Seed is easy to miss if you aren't paying attention. It's in the Money Laundering Office, the area with the money floating around past the second elevator. Head down the main walkway, and turn left. Move your way stealthily down the corridor, avoiding the security cameras, and hang a left past the doorway.

Look down, and you'll notice a crawl space. Go through that, and walk forward until you can jump down. Don't walk forward after that; there's another area you can reach, but it won't lead to the Will Seed.

Instead, turn around, and jump down to another ledge. Walk forward, and you'll see another grate you can hop across to. Climb up the fixture that's right in front of you, and the grappling hook indicator will light up. Use it, enjoy the flashy cutscene, and grab the blue Will Seed.

Green Kaneshiro Will Seed

The last of Kaneshiro's Will Seeds is the most straightforward. It's in the last area, where you'll input all the PIN codes to shift the vault lock.

When you get to the first terminal that has you push a button, push the button until the left arrow on the terminal lights up (it should happen the first time). Go through the new opening, and you'll find another terminal. Push the button again so the left arrow lights up, and you'll access a long hallway. At the end of it is a Shadow guard blocking your way.

This time, it's the Guard Dog of Hades, also known as Cerberus. The same rules apply to it as to the other Will Seed mini-bosses. It's extra powerful, and while it has the same resistances, it doesn't have the same weaknesses.

Don't use fire/Agi attacks, because the Dog absorbs those. Physical attacks are fine, but be aware it does have the Counter-Strike skill. Your best bet is going for Technical moves, which can also lead to an All-Out Attack, so don't hesitate to use status-inflicting skills.

Dormina is an easy one, because almost any other skill used on a sleeping foe results in a Technical. Makoto's Makajam is another good one. It prevents the Dog from using skills and, if you have any Psi-based skills, opens it up for another Technical attack and heavier damage.

The Crystal of Gluttony

The Crystal of Gluttony you get from combining the three Will Seeds raises your party's defense. After you get Jose to refine it in Mementos, it turns into the Ring of Gluttony. The Ring of Gluttony nullifies one elemental attack for the entire party — which is very, very useful, especially if you're doing a Merciless mode run.

---

That's it for our Persona 5 Kaneshiro Will Seeds guide. Be sure to brush up on what's ahead for the next palace's Will Seeds with our Decadent False God guide, and check out our other Persona 5 Royal guides, including:

]]>
Animal Crossing Star Fragments: How to Get Them in New Horizons https://www.gameskinny.com/uz6q4/animal-crossing-star-fragments-how-to-get-them-in-new-horizons https://www.gameskinny.com/uz6q4/animal-crossing-star-fragments-how-to-get-them-in-new-horizons Tue, 21 Apr 2020 20:14:18 -0400 Joshua Broadwell

You might be wondering how to get Animal Crossing star fragments in New Horizons, especially if you've happened across Celeste, Blathers' sister. The former observatory manager gives you multiple DIY Recipes that require certain numbers and types of star fragments.

That's great, but it's easy to overlook how to get what you need — which is why we put together this Animal Crossing: New Horizons Star Fragment guide. Here's what you need to know to get crafting now instead of later. 

Animal Crossing Star Fragments: How to Get Them

Getting Star Fragments is pretty simple. All you need to do is wish on a star. To do that, just tilt the right stick up, wait for a star to come loose from the firmament, and press "A" as it races across the sky.

When you'll actually get a meteor shower isn't completely certain. It only happens on clear nights, but it doesn't seem to happen every clear night. Sometimes, your island neighbors give you a clue by mentioning how the weather is perfect for shooting stars.

Also, if Celeste is in your town, it's a guarantee a meteor shower is going on (but Celeste being there isn't an actual requirement).

Either way, it's much easier to tell if you've got the volume up, as you'll hear a little twinkling sound each time a star comes on the scene.

Equally important, you aren't limited with how many stars you can wish on. You can only wish once on each star, but if you're looking to really rack up the number of Star Fragments you get, wish on every one you see.

The day after you wish on stars (after the daily announcement, not after midnight), head out and walk up and down the beaches. You'll find Star Fragments proportional to the number of stars you wished on. What kind they are, however, is another story.

Type of Animal Crossing Star Fragments in New Horizons

There are three different kinds of fragment:

  • Star Fragments
  • Large Star Fragments
  • Zodiac Star Fragments

Unfortunately, it seems completely random what kind you get. That's why it's in your best interest to wish on as many as possible.

It also seems like your Zodiac Star Fragments are determined by the astrological calendar:

  • Capricorn — December 22-January 19
  • Aquarius — January 20-February 18
  • Pisces — February 19-March 20
  • Aries — March 21-April 19
  • Taurus — April 20-May 20
  • Gemini — May 21-June 20
  • Cancer — June 21-July 22
  • Leo — July 23-August 22
  • Virgo — August 23- September 22
  • Libra — September 23-October 22
  • Scorpio — October 23-November 21
  • Sagittarius — November 22-December 21
What are Star Fragments?

Star Fragments are used in various DIY Recipes, and the one you'll likely get first is the Magic Wand. This, along with the many other variations (Bunny Day Wand, Bamboo Wand, flower wands, and so on) let you store outfits and change into them on the fly as costumes.

There's a range of actual star-themed items as well, and you'll need Star Fragments and Large Star Fragments for the space furniture set this time around.

Finally is the Zodiac set Celeste gives you a recipe for every month. So far, we've got the Aries Rocking Chair and Taurus Bath, but there are other time travelers found. If you don't want to wait to finish the set, that's always an option too.

And that's all you need to know about how to get Animal Crossing star fragments in New Horizons. Be sure to check out our comprehensive collection of Animal Crossing: New Horizons guides.

]]>
Pokemon GO Volbeat, Alolan Meowth Available During New Buddy Event https://www.gameskinny.com/e20ie/pokemon-go-volbeat-alolan-meowth-available-during-new-buddy-event https://www.gameskinny.com/e20ie/pokemon-go-volbeat-alolan-meowth-available-during-new-buddy-event Tue, 21 Apr 2020 17:30:11 -0400 Joshua Broadwell

Under normal circumstances, Pokemon GO Volbeat locations are locked to specific regions; they usually appear in Europe, Asia, and Oceania, making it rather difficult for players in the Americas to actually catch 'em all. That's changing with the brand-new Buddy Up event, though.

The latest Pokemon GO Buddy Up event is live now through April 27 at 10 p.m. local time, and it introduces a chance to obtain a number of usually elusive Pokemon.

Pokemon GO Volbeat Locations

The biggest part of the Pokemon GO Buddy Up Event is Volbeat and Illumise being made available worldwide in the wild and in Eggs. You'll find them anywhere, even close to your home, so it's a perfect chance to nab a Pokemon you couldn't get before.

If you don't want to search for one, you can also obtain Volbeat through completing Field Research Tasks during the event. As is the case with these types of events, there's even a chance you'll run across a Shiny Volbeat (or Shiny Illumise).

Pokemon GO Buddy Up Event

The latest Buddy Up event introduces a number of other surprises and treats. The first is Woobat. For the first time ever, you'll get the chance to encounter Woobat in the wild after completing associated Field Research Tasks. After the Buddy Up event ends, it'll still appear in the wild and possibly in 2k Eggs.

These Pokemon will also be more common during the Buddy Up event:

All these, except Chansey, will be more common in 5k Eggs during the event as well.

Finally, you can take part in a number of special Field Research Tasks specifically designed for the Buddy Up Event. You'll get bonus Stardust for these tasks, plus the chance to encounter Alolan Meowth and Illumise, along with Volbeat and Woobat as we mentioned before.

Pokemon registered as Buddy Pokemon will bring you gifts more often. It'll be easier to get your Buddy 'mon excited, and the event halves the distance required for Buddy Candy. They'll stick around you for longer, too, if you feed them Poffins and Berries.

Finally, you'll get double XP for evolving any Pokemon, Buddy or otherwise.

---

That's all you need to know about Pokemon GO Volbeat locations and the latest Pokemon GO Buddy Up event. The full event notes are over on the Pokemon GO Live site. Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more Pokemon GO guides and news.

]]>
How to Get the Compound Bow in Fallout 76 https://www.gameskinny.com/j6dvl/how-to-get-the-compound-bow-in-fallout-76 https://www.gameskinny.com/j6dvl/how-to-get-the-compound-bow-in-fallout-76 Tue, 21 Apr 2020 12:09:50 -0400 Jason Coles

The Fallout 76 compound bow is only one of the many recent additions to the online action RPG with the Wastelanders update. Outside of the crowds of NPCs roaming the wild wastes ready to strike up a conversation at the drop of the hat, it's one of the new weapons to be had.

Of all of the new weapons, including the standard bow, none of them is quite as stylish as the compound bow. It's stealthy, it makes you feel awesome, it's probably not very effective against Power Armor, but hey, it's cool, and style is important, baby. 

How to Get the Compound Bow in Fallout 76

Get the Compound Bow by Completing the Wayward Bar Quest

The easiest way to get the bow is to head to the Wayward Bar near Vault 76 and follow the questline that Duchess gives you there. Play through the quest and you'll earn the plans as a reward. This particular questline is available to all players no matter what, which makes it the most efficient way possible to acquire this new weapon. 

This'll save you money, too, and is probably the most efficient way of getting the bow if you'd rather not commit to either of the factions. Of course, if you just don't like Duchess for some reason, then you can always ignore them and choose to side with one of the factions instead to get the bow. 

Get the Compound Bow by Siding with Factions

If you want to unlock the compound bow in Fallout 76 in a different way, then you'll first need to make your way to Foundation, which is a settlement of NPCs added in the Wastelanders update.

Here, you'll need to play nice with the Settlers, which is one of the new factions. Go on quests for them, keep an eye on daily faction quests, say lovely things about their shoes, notice their new haircuts, that kind of thing. 

Once you reach the rank of Ally, you'll be able to buy the compound bow

You can only purchase the bow from Sunny's Store in Foundation once you've reached the rank of Ally with the Settlers. You can actually buy some useful items from there long before you unlock the compound bow, but you'll have to prove yourself before they'll sell it to you. 

If the settlers just aren't doing it for you, you can also get the bow by building your relationship up with the Raiders over in Crater instead. It's the same kind of process, just with a different faction and different faces. If you side with the Raiders, you'll need to purchase the plans from Guns, Guns, Guns.

Both of these methods will allow you to purchase the plans for 300 caps

Best Compound Bow Perks

Once you've got your hands on the bow, you'll want to wield it with deadly accuracy. The best way to do that, other than working on your aiming, is to choose the right perks. 

The Bow Before Me perk will give your bows and crossbows the ability to ignore armor and even give them a small chance to stagger on hit, too.

The Archer perk allows you to boost the damage of your bows and crossbows, and you can also take the Expert Archer perk to stack even more damage per hit. 

If you take all three of these perks, you'll be an absolute powerhouse of an archer who'd give Legolas a run for his money. 

---

That's all you need to know about the Fallout 76 compound bow in Wastelanders. For more tips on the wasteland, be sure to check out our other Fallout 76 guides

]]>
Fallout 76 Gauley Mine Keypad Code: How to Open the Cage Door https://www.gameskinny.com/0zv9a/fallout-76-gauley-mine-keypad-code-how-to-open-the-cage-door https://www.gameskinny.com/0zv9a/fallout-76-gauley-mine-keypad-code-how-to-open-the-cage-door Mon, 20 Apr 2020 21:08:54 -0400 GS_Staff

The Fallout 76 Gauley Mine keypad code is one of the many keycodes and pins scattered across the wasteland. However, you'll most likely come across the supply cache locked away by this code after completing most of Overseer's Mission side quest. You'll even come across an ID card door added in Wastelanders

With the release of Wastelanders, the Overseer is ready to get all of those holotapes you've been collecting. Luckily, unlike the mysterious cave code that gets you into Vault 79, the Gauley Mine keypad combination isn't random. It's the same for all players. 

Fallout 76 Gauley Mine Keypad Code

Instead of looking all over the mine for the keycode itself, here it is: 

  • 071990

At this point in the game, you probably don't really need the supplies that are secreted away in the Gauley Mine. But then again, loot is loot and explosives are explosives. If you're still early on in Fallout 76, you'll definitely want to grab the goodies inside the locked cage. 

Gauley Mine Location

Haven't found Gauley Mine yet? Just head southwest of Morgantown trainyard in The Forest region and cross the river. Keep heading southwest until hit the railroad tracks and follow them south. Gauley Mine will eventually pop up on your right. 

For more landmarks, it's southeast of the Landview Lighthouse. Cross the river and the railroad tracks and you should see it. If you're coming from the south, it's just northwest of Slocum's Joe. 

The exact location is circled in the image at the top of this guide. 

Gauley Mine Cage Location

Enter the mine and follow the minecart track all the way down until it dead ends. You'll kill two moles rats and turn right at the dead-end to go through a tunnel in the wall. You'll eventually enter an open area with catwalks and machinery. 

Take out the enemies and go down into the bottom of this area. The cage is built into the wall in the back. It is to the right of a workbench, and it has a door on it. The keypad is to the right of the door. 

Be Careful of Scorched

If you're playing Wastelanders, you probably don't have to be worried about Scorched, but it's still worth noting that Gauley Mine is overrun with them, as well as Scorched Wanderers. Bringing a ranged weapon is a good idea. 

What About the Gauley Mine ID Card? 

Wastelanders brings a lot of new content to Fallout 76. Some additions are very obvious, like ally quests. Other additions are less so. The ID card door in Gauley mine is of the latter variety. 

Unfortunately, you probably can't open it quite yet. However, it comes naturally as you progress through Wastelanders. Eventually, you'll find yourself back in the mine opening up the ID-locked door in no time. 

---

That's all you need to know about the Fallout 76 Gauley Mine keypad code. For more on the post-apocalyptic quasi-MMO, be sure to check out our other Fallout 76 guides

Header image source: Game-Maps

]]>
Fallout 76 Mysterious Cave Code: How to Get Into Vault 79 https://www.gameskinny.com/4zp48/fallout-76-mysterious-cave-code-how-to-get-into-vault-79 https://www.gameskinny.com/4zp48/fallout-76-mysterious-cave-code-how-to-get-into-vault-79 Mon, 20 Apr 2020 18:33:10 -0400 GS_Staff

The Fallout 76 mysterious cave code is a random code that helps you get into Vault 79. The cave code itself is completely randomized, and it is a different set of numbers for each and every player. So instead of outright giving you the code (we really wish we could!), this guide will tell you where to find the map six fragments to get the code. 

To get the fragments, you'll have to do a little hunting and a fair share of schlepping around the wasteland. Luckily, it's mostly worth it as you'll get to enter the previously-closed Vault 79. 

The upstairs room of the Grafton Pawn Shop will give you clues for finding the pieces you need, but we'll tell you where they are in case you don't want to solve the puzzle yourself. 

Each piece of the map is in a sealed manila envelope. You can do these in any order that you wish, but we will be going clockwise around the map. 

Where to Find the Fallout 76 Mysterious Code Map Fragments

Mysterious Code Map Fragment 1

This map fragment can be found in Morgantown High School. Obviously located in Morgantown, the high school can be found on the northern edge of the city. It is almost due east of the Morgantown airport and south of Grafton Dam. 

Go to the top floor of the school and look for the classroom above the school's kitchen. The envelope is on a desk in the back of the room. There is a red swivel chair in front of the desk and a broken monitor on the desk. 

Mysterious Code Map Fragment 2

This map fragment can be found at Red Rocket Mega Stop. This location is in the northeastern portion of the Savage Divide North region, directly south of the Baily Family Cabin and northwest of Vault 94. 

Go inside the main building for the Red Rocket station and grab the envelope with the fragment off of the counter inside. It will be next to a radio emitting a light. 

Mysterious Code Map Fragment 3

This map fragment can be found at Haven Church. This is located on the extreme eastern side of the map in The Mire. It is across the river from Treehouse Village and south of Dyer Chemical. It is northwest of the Abandoned Waste Dump. 

Go inside the long building jutting out from the side of the church. The envelope is on another desk, which has filing cabinets and orange swivel chairs behind it.  

Mysterious Code Map Fragment 4

This map fragment can be found at The General's Steakhouse. This is located in the northeastern portion of the Cranberry Bog. It is right next to Firebase LT and just northeast of Mac's Farm. 

Go inside the steakhouse and make your way to the bar. The envelope will once again be on the counter near the cash register. There will be a post between the envelope and the cash register. 

Mysterious Code Map Fragment 5

This map fragment can be found in the Uncanny Caverns in the Ash Heap region. This location is just northeast of Lewisburg and south of Relay Tower Dp-B5-21.

Once you get there, go inside the building with the gift shop sign outside and grab the fragment off of the counter near the cash register. 

Mysterious Code Map Fragment 6

This map fragment can be found inside the Mothman Museum, which is located in Point Pleasant. This is in The Forest region on the extreme western edge, west of Marigold Pavillion, northwest of Hunter's Ridge, and southwest from Black Mountain Ordnance Works. 

Go inside the Mothman Museum and grab the fragment off of the desk directly in front of you. It will be next to the cash register. 

How to Get the Pin

Now go back to the pawnshop and place the map fragments on the right side of the room. Turn on the black light to get the code. 

Vault 79 Location

Vault 79 is located in the mountains north of the Baily Family Cabin. Look for a cave opening going into the mountain. The rock around the cave opening will have great vines growing all over it. 

---

That's it for the mysterious cave code in Fallout 76. For more, be sure to check out our other Fallout 76 guides while you're here. 

Header image source: Fallout wiki

]]>
Final Fantasy 7 Remake: How to Beat Hell House https://www.gameskinny.com/x23zz/final-fantasy-7-remake-how-to-beat-hell-house https://www.gameskinny.com/x23zz/final-fantasy-7-remake-how-to-beat-hell-house Mon, 20 Apr 2020 12:46:14 -0400 Sergey_3847

At the end of the Corneo Colosseum mission in Final Fantasy 7 Remake, you'll fight one of the hardest bosses in the game: Hell House. This boss has some big surprises behind its walls, so be well prepared for the fight. You will find all the necessary tips on how to beat Hell House in our guide below.

Before attempting to beat Hell House, be sure to equip four elemental materias, such as ice, wind, fire, and lightning. 

Final Fantasy 7 Remake: How to Beat Hell House

Hell House Phase 1

This phase lasts until Hell House's life total drops to 75%. During this phase, Hell House doesn't do much except throw some furniture at you. Do nothing but avoid the hits. You'll get a chance to hit back soon enough.

During the following attack stage, Hell House will throw some stuffed toys at you. These are bombs that explode on impact. You will need to move around the arena to avoid them all. 

Finally, Hell House will attempt to absorb Cloud or Aerith; it's part of its Hospitality attack pattern. This is your chance to start dealing damage in conjunction with its current elemental resistances.

You can identify resistances by looking at the colors of Hell House's windows:

  • Red = Fire
  • Yellow = Lightning
  • Blue = Ice
  • Green = Wind

Use Aerith's elemental spells to counter these resistances:

  • Use Ice on Fire (Red)
  • Use Wind on Lightning (Yellow)
  • Use Fire on Ice (Blue)
  • Use Lightning on Wind (Green)
Hell House Phase 2

When Hell House's life total drops to 75%, it will activate its robotic limbs and start chasing you around. Hell House will also activate an additional energy barrier that will protect it from both physical and elemental damage.

At first, avoid Hell House's charge attacks by moving sideways. When it activates its Jetstream attack (shooting flames of fire all around), use Ice spells in response. This will make Hell House angry, and that's when it will activate its God House mode and its barrier.

Fortunately, the robotic limbs will not be protected, so focus all your attacks at them for now. When Hell House gets weaker, it will drop the barrier, and that's when you hit it right in the front door using the same elemental response attacks as above.

Here are some extra tips for Phase 2:

  • Use Poison to keep dealing damage to Hell House even when the barrier is up.
  • Hell House changes elemental resistances after each Barrier Shift phase.
  • Summons are practically useless against Hell House, so don't waste your time using them.
Hell House Phase 3

As Hell House's life total drops below 50%, it will activate its flying ability during the final third phase, which is rather dangerous. Don't try to hit Hell House in the air, but focus on avoiding its Chair Salvo attack that drops flaming chair bombs from the air. This attack will start a countdown.

When the countdown is over, Hell House will drop to the ground and enter its second phase once again, with the barrier and the Hospitality absorbing attack. Be ready to heal Cloud, who will most likely get absorbed more often than Aerith.

Rinse and repeat until you deplete the rest of Hell House's health bar. 

Here are some extra tips for Phase 3:

  • Use Revival Materia to bring back to life a downed partner.
  • Use Aerith's Limit Break Level 2 spell to make your party immune to damage for a limited period of time.
  • Use Barrier spell to further protect your party, when the immunity spell wears off.

---

That's it on how to beat Hell House boss in Final Fantasy 7 Remake. For more Final Fantasy 7 Remake guides, check out the list below:

]]>
How to Complete Ally: Crash Landing in Fallout 76 https://www.gameskinny.com/l0hu5/how-to-complete-ally-crash-landing-in-fallout-76 https://www.gameskinny.com/l0hu5/how-to-complete-ally-crash-landing-in-fallout-76 Mon, 20 Apr 2020 11:46:31 -0400 Jason Coles

The once desolate and empty world of Fallout 76 is now replete with NPCs to interact with thanks to the Wastelanders update. That means new quests and things to do, including completing the Ally: Crash Landing quest with Commander Daguerre. 

Since you can now recruit allies to help you out in Wastelanders, completing this quest is a good way to provide a general boost to your overall power in the wasteland. 

Commander Daguerre, a badass who is more than ready and willing to help you take out anything foolish enough to stand in your way, is a good ally to have. You need to be able to find them first, though, and then you'll need to scratch their back before they'll watch yours. Here's how to do it. 

How to Complete Ally: Crash Landing in Fallout 76

The first thing you'll need to do is reach Level 20+. If you've just started, then this might take a few hours. 

Once you reach Level 20+ — or if you're already there — you now need to find Commander Daguerre. They're in The Mire, very close to the East Ridge Lookout

From the East Ridge Lookout, head south, down the side of the cliff until you find an Abandoned Bunker. Then make your way inside and head right. You'll find Commander Daguerre there in a bit of a state. 

Chat with her, and she'll ask you to find her crashed ship and recover some data from it. The ship is southwest of your current location at the Abandoned Bunker, so make your way over to the marker and start downloading the data.

The takes a couple of minutes, and, naturally, you'll be attacked by a suicide mutant while you're waiting. This can be tricky if you've only just hit Level 20, so it's worth making sure you're a little stronger if you want to have an easier time of things. Listen out for the mini-nuke beeping and have a long-range weapon handy. 

Head on back to Daguerre, and she'll ask you to get an encryption key from a nearby robot named Pandora. Naturally, this isn't a peaceful affair, so you'll have to be ready to throw down with the Assaultron to get the key.

Take shots at the legs to incapacitate them, and then finish them off. If you have a sniper rifle or shotgun, bring those along, and use the Enforcer perk. If you're good at sneaking and feel brave, melee can work well, too. 

Once you're done, return to the Abandoned Bunker.

It's at this point that the Commander will talk about wishing they head a working console, and you can invite them to your C.A.M.P. and build them one. 

---

That's it for the Ally: Crashing Landing quest in Fallout 76. Now that you have Daguerre in your camp, she becomes a romance option and provides a longer questline, which has an awesome alien weapon as a reward. For more on Fallout 76, check our guides hub

]]>
Final Fantasy 7 Remake: Corneo's Secret Stash Walkthrough https://www.gameskinny.com/sd0wx/final-fantasy-7-remake-corneos-secret-stash-walkthrough https://www.gameskinny.com/sd0wx/final-fantasy-7-remake-corneos-secret-stash-walkthrough Sat, 18 Apr 2020 11:12:59 -0400 Gabriel Moss

So you're playing Final Fantasy 7 Remake and you've run across a few locked doors engraved with red dragons (and treasure visibly piled behind them!), and you're curious about how to get inside and pick up the loot. This guide walks you through all of the steps of the "Corneo's Secret Stash" quest in Final Fantasy 7 Remake

Don't worry, we've got you covered. We go over how to complete the quest for the missing key and beat the Beastmaster and Hellhound, and then we'll go over each stash location. 

Final Fantasy 7 Remake Corneo's Secret Stash Walkthrough

Once you've reached Chapter 14, pop on over to the Sector 5 Slums and meet up with your old pal, Damon the news reporter. He'll send you off on a quest to find a missing key.

Before doing so, you'll also want to swing by the Sector 5 Slums Train Station and grab the Tomboy Bandit quest off of Johnny. Both quests point you to the abandoned chapel, which is where you'll meet Kyrie.

After a short dialog sequence, Kyrie asks you to fight in her place at the Colosseum (underneath Wall Market) in exchange for the key that the reporter has asked you to find.

Once you reach the Colisseum, speak to the handler to enter the special battle. You'll fight the Beastmaster and the Hellhound, which are tough together but can be taken down one-by-one.

Hit the Beastmaster with regular attacks and Fire attacks. As for the Hellhound, you can quickly stagger it by hitting its red-colored flaming head with Ice magic and its purple-colored flaming head with Cure magic.

Return to Kyrie at the chapel after winning the fight, and the key to Corneo's secret stash is all yours. At this point, you can now return to Johnny to complete Tomboy Bandit as well.

Corneo Stash #1: Collapsed Expressway

As you're first entering the Caved-In Tunnel part of the Collapsed Expressway, take a left turn at the first turn-in and find the stash. This is where you'll pick up the Diamond Tiara key item as well.

Corneo Stash #2: Steel Mountain

Head over to the Steel Mountain section of the Sector 5 Slums and up the steps to the Corneo stash that you might have first spotted during Chapter 8. It's open now! Get inside and grab all the treasure, which includes a bevy of Moogle Medals and the Ruby Tiara key item.

Corneo Stash #3: Sewers

This is the trickiest one to get into. In order to do this, you'll need to progress the story forward if you haven't yet. Just head on over to Don Corneo's house and Leslie will be there waiting for you, at which point he'll run you through the Sewers again and take you where you need to go.

If you've already been through the Sewers part of the main story in Chapter 14, just pop into the Urban Advancement District and through the fenced gate, which allows you to climb back into the Sewers whenever you want during Chapter 14.

After the Mischievous Shoat boss has been beaten, you can find a flooded stairwell right past where you fought it in the Former Disposal Area part of the Old Trunk Line - Control Section.

Head to the ladder that lets you out of the Sewers (or in, depending on where you're coming from) and hit the switch next to it, draining the stairwell. Backtrack all the way to the now un-flooded stairwell and make your way inside, where you'll face off against the Sahagin Prince and his band of Ninja Turtle lookalikes.

The Sahagin Prince is similar to other Sahagins in that he'll often use Jump and Harpoon abilities to crash down on you and your buds. He'll also turn you into a frog, so make sure to have Maiden's Kiss or Remedy items, or Level 2 Cleansing Materia equipped to each party member.

As with other Sahagins, you can nail the Prince with Fire attacks. However, watch out for his counterattack mode. This is when he's easiest to stagger with Fire magic, so when he's countering you, go all-in with a heavy spell like Firaga (if you have it).

Once the Sahagin Prince and company are dispatched, loot the third treasure and return to Marle, who'll reward you with The Art of Swordplay Vol. III, which grants Cloud 10 SP.

---

And that's how you complete the Corneo's Secret Stash quest in Final Fantasy 7 Remake. For more Final Fantasy 7 Remake guides, check out the list below:

]]>
Final Fantasy 7 Remake: Where to Find the Keycard in Chapter 3 https://www.gameskinny.com/fnqcz/final-fantasy-7-remake-where-to-find-the-keycard-in-chapter-3 https://www.gameskinny.com/fnqcz/final-fantasy-7-remake-where-to-find-the-keycard-in-chapter-3 Sat, 18 Apr 2020 11:01:32 -0400 Gabriel Moss

Having trouble getting the keycard to the door in the Abandoned Talagger Factory in Final Fantasy 7 Remake Chapter 3?

If so, it's no big deal! We've gone through the quest "Just Flew in From the Graveyard" and done our fair share of keycard collecting already, so we'll explain just how it's done.

Final Fantasy 7 Remake: Where to Find the Keycard in Chapter 3

The sixth and final sidequest of Chapter 3 is unlocked once you've completed the others before it, namely the one where the Junk Dealer sends you into the Abandoned Talagger Factory in the quest titled "Nuisance in the Factory."

Called "Just Flew In From the Graveyard," a local named Gwen (waiting at the gates to Sector 6, where the two Shinra guards are standing) will send you back to the Abandoned Talagger Factory to kill a cerulean drake for her.

The only problem is that this drake is hidden behind a locked door on the opposite side of the factory. She'll tell you that in order to unlock the aforementioned door, you need to "smash any boxes nearby."

She isn't joking about this. Smashing virtually any boxes inside of the Abandoned Talagger Factory zone can get you the "watch security key" to open the locked door to the cerulean drake.

Just run around and smash any of the boxes you see until you get a 'watch security key', then you can go back and unlock the door.

If you run out of boxes to smash, just keep running back and forth inside of the factory. Boxes will respawn as you move around from room to room, but so will monsters, so be careful and make sure to heal after every battle.

]]>
Final Fantasy 7 Remake Steal: How to Improve Your Steal Rate https://www.gameskinny.com/3xi2h/final-fantasy-7-remake-steal-how-to-improve-your-steal-rate https://www.gameskinny.com/3xi2h/final-fantasy-7-remake-steal-how-to-improve-your-steal-rate Fri, 17 Apr 2020 12:49:14 -0400 Sergey_3847

Looking to improve your Final Fantasy 7 steal rates? Look no further. One of the most important mechanics in Final Fantasy 7 Remake is the steal mechanic, which lets you lift important items from enemies during combat. This guide will help you improve your steal success rate in Final Fantasy 7 Remake.

There are two surefire methods for stealing in FF7R. We cover both methods below, including a list of the best rare items you can steal from your enemies.

How to Improve Final Fantasy 7 Remake Steal Rates

1. Obtain Luck Up Materia

The steal command is available after you obtain the steal materia. But in order to increase your chances of stealing valuable items, you need to also get the Luck Up material. Follow this guide to get them.

After you obtain both materias, you will notice that not only has your steal success rate been increased but so has your Critical Hit chance rate.

2. Obtain the Nail Bat

Another way to increase your steal chance is to get the Nail Bat melee weapon by completing the "Kids on Patrol" quest during Chapter 8.

This weapon is imbued with the Luck Up weapon skill that has a similar effect on the steal command as Luck Up materia.

Important Items to Steal in FF7R

There are some items in Final Fantasy 7 Remake that cannot be obtained from any shop or treasure chest. You can only steal these items from enemies using the steal materia.

All the rare items are listed below with the names of enemies you can steal them from:

Item
Enemy
Iron Maiden M.O.T.H. Unit
Heavy-Duty Bracer Blast-Ray
Champion Belt Grungy Bandit
Magician’s Bracelet Reno
Heavy-Duty Bracer Rude
Timeworn Talisman Specimen H0512
Enchanted Ring Type-0 Behemoth
Poison Materia Failed Experiment
Orb of Gravity Helitrooper
Turbo Ether 3-C SOLDIER Operator
Spiderweb Grashtrike
Elixir Tonberry
Molotov Cocktail Crab Warden
Cuddlesworth Hell House
AI Programming Core Airbuster

 

That's it on how to increase Final Fantasy 7 Remake steal rate. For more Final Fantasy 7 Remake guides, check out the list below:

]]>
Final Fantasy 7 Remake: All Music Disc Locations https://www.gameskinny.com/83eek/final-fantasy-7-remake-all-music-disc-locations https://www.gameskinny.com/83eek/final-fantasy-7-remake-all-music-disc-locations Thu, 16 Apr 2020 14:39:39 -0400 Joshua Broadwell

Final Fantasy 7 Remake's Disc Jockey trophy involves collecting every music disc in Midgar. There are 31 music discs in total, and while some are pretty easy to find, others require speaking to specific NPCs and visiting certain places. 

Below, we list the discs in numerical order, which isn't the order you'll come across them in during your playthrough. The game clues you in when you're near a disc as well; you'll hear the soundtrack change and see a ??? indicator in the upper left corner of the screen.

Final Fantasy 7 Remake Music Discs

Disc 1: The Prelude
  • Chapter 3 (Sector 7)
  • Slums weapon shop (the one you visit for the water filter mini-quest)
Disc 2: Bombing Mission 
  • Chapter 7 (Mako Reactor 5)
  • Purchase from the vending machine in the break room after defeating the Air Buster boss. It's the one where you have to activate three switches at once.
Disc 3: Tifa's Theme 
  • Chapter 3 (Sector 7)
  • Seventh Heaven; interact with the jukebox.
Disc 4: Barret's Theme 
  • Chapter 4 (Sector 7)
  • Purchase from the train station item shop in Sector 7.
Disc 5: Lurking in the Darkness 
  • Chapter 15 (Collapsed Plate, crumbling building section)
  • Vending machine near the bench you'll find around the crumbling building segment
Disc 6: Let the Battles Begin 
  • Chapter 11 (Train Graveyard)
  • Outside the train warehouse control room is a bench with a vending machine. Buy the disc from the machine.
Disc 7: Turk's Theme 
  • Chapter 14 (Road going north out of Wall Market)
  • Head out of Wall Market towards Sector 5. Check your map, and you'll see a loop in the road. Go left, and speak to the woman you find on the path.
Disc 8: Under the Rotting Pizza 
  • Chapter 9 (Wall Market)
  • Interact with the jukebox in an alley south of the Inn in Wall Market
Disc 9: The Oppressed 
  • Chapter 10 (Sewer)
  • The first time you raise a sluice gate, you get access to a break room area. Buy the disc from the vending machine.
Disc 10: The Honey Bee Inn 
  • Chapter 9 (Wall Market)
  • Buy from the Wall Market item shop.
Disc 11: Don of the Slums 
  • Chapter 9 (Don Corneo's Mansion)
  • Purchase from the vending machine in the back of the room where you rescue Tifa.
Disc 12: Fight On! 
  • Chapter 14 (Corneo Colosseum)
  • Buy from the souvenir shop.
Disc 13: The Chase 
  • Chapter 14 (Sewers)
  • Purchase from the vending machine in the sewers as you head towards Corneo's lair.
Disc 14: Main Theme of FFVII 
  • Chapter 13 (Shinra Testing Facility)
  • Purchase from the B1 breakroom vending machine.
Disc 15: On Our Way 
  • Chapter 13 (Evergreen Park)
  • Buy from the park item shop; it's in Sector 6, near the entrance to Sector 7.
Disc 16: Good Night, Until Tomorrow 
  • Chapter 14 (Wall Market)
  • Talk to the old man in the Wall Market Inn, and you get this one for free.
Disc 17: Farm Boy
  • Chapter 9 (Wall Market)
  • Go up the stairs next to Chadley, and talk to the woman in the cowgirl hat.
Disc 18: Electric de Chocobo 
  • Chapter 6 (Sector 4 Upper Plate)
  • It's in the Ventilation Chamber break room (near where you get the Chocobo summon). Head west past the cargo elevator and take a gondola to the ventilation area.
Disc 19: Costa del Sol 
  • Chapter 8 (Sector 5 Undercity)
  • Buy from the Materia shop.
Disc 20: Gold Saucer
  • Chapter 8 (Sector 5, Kid's Hideout)
  • Buy this one from the Moogle Emporium in the kids' hideout.
Disc 21: Cait Sith's Theme
  • Chapter 8 (Sector 5 Train Station)
  • Buy from the vending machine.
Disc 22: Cosmo Canyon 
  • Chapter 9 (Wall Market)
  • Vending machine at the dead end of the alley, after you finish the second robot puzzle with Aerith.
Disc 23: Descendant of Shinobi 
  • Chapter 8 or 14 (Sector 5 Undercity Train Station)
  • Speak to Johnny at the station to buy this. If you miss it in Chapter 8, you have another chance in Chapter 14.
Disc 24: Wutai 
  • Chapter 14 (Wall Market)
  • Speak to the NPC near the entrance of Don Corneo's mansion, in the Urban Advancement District
Disc 25: Tango of Tears 
  • Chapter 8 (Sector 5)
  • Interact with the Sector 5 community center jukebox.
Disc 26: Let the Battles Begin - REMAKE 
  • Chapter 9 (Honey Bee Inn)
  • Get 10 Great ratings during the dance mini-game.
Disc 27: Hip Hop de Chocobo 
  • Chapter 3 (Sector 7)
  • Talk to the NPC near the Pizza Sign (and near the phonograph) as you're following the Shinra soldiers.
Disc 28: Stamp
  • Chapter 5 (Rail Yard)
  • In the Corkscrew Tunnel break room's vending machine, accessible after you defeat the Sentry Launchers.
Disc 29: The Midgar Blues
  • Chapter 9 (Wall Market)
  • Speak to the NPC trying to sing outside Drunkard's Den.
Disc 30: Stand Up
  • Chapter 14 (Honey Bee Inn)
  • Enter the Honey Bee Inn, and turn left. Go through the passage, enter the alley, and speak to the woman there to get the disc.
Disc 31: Scarlett's Theme
  • Chapter 16 (Shinra Tower)
  • Interact with the jukebox near the Item Shop counter in the Combat Simulator area.

---

That's every music disc in Final Fantasy 7 Remake. Snag the last one in Shinra Tower, and you'll be all set for the Disc Jockey trophy. Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more Final Fantasy 7 Remake guides.

]]>
Final Fantasy 7 Remake Chocobo Search Quest: How to Find Sam's Chocobos https://www.gameskinny.com/6fm15/final-fantasy-7-remake-chocobo-search-quest-how-to-find-sams-chocobos https://www.gameskinny.com/6fm15/final-fantasy-7-remake-chocobo-search-quest-how-to-find-sams-chocobos Thu, 16 Apr 2020 14:22:51 -0400 John Schutt

The Final Fantasy 7 Remake Chocobo Search sidequest has you combing the Midgar undercity for three wayward Chocobos. It's one of the many sidequests available in Chapter 14. 

This guide will show you the Chocobo locations, the best way to get each of them, and what you need to do to get them back to safety. 

Once you've found and saved all three chocobos, you'll head back to Chocobo Sam in Wall Market. He'll express his thanks and give you a lifetime pass on Chocobo carriage rides, making them free for the rest of the game. 

Starting the Quest and Chocobo 1

Starting Chocobo Search is easy enough. Just head to the clearing north of the Sector 5 slums, and a stablehand will automatically ask Cloud and company for help. From there, the three Chocobo locations will appear on the nearby fast travel sign. You'll know this sign from the big Chocobo symbol on it. 

The first and easier Chocobo to return is the one at the top of the map, on the way to Aerith's church.

From the slums, simply go past where you met the stablehand and follow the path north. Eventually, you'll run across the big bird, quivering in an alcove on the left side of the path. 

Just walk up, press the interact button, and you've made a big new yellow friend. It's here on the map.

Chocobo 2

The next Chocobo is the one in Steel Mountain. It's in the complex near the church where you landed after escaping Aerith's church. There are two ways to get there. 

From the church, follow the path back toward the stablehand and take the first right. From the slums, go past said stablehand and take the first right. You'll make your way into the area called Steel Mountain, where the second Chocobo cowers in front of the big green steel plates.

Approach as before and interact with the bird. It's here on the map.

Beware, things will not be so easy this time. A miniboss will appear, and you can only rescue the yellow friend by defeating it.

The biggest threat this monster poses is the Gravity spells it casts. They'll suck your party toward a single point and drain about 10-15% of their health every five seconds or so, which can and will wipe you if you aren't keeping track of your party's health bars.

Attack constantly during these gravity casts to build the stagger bar, then wail on the thing until it dies. Do that, and you can send the bird back home.

Chocobo 3

The third and final Chocobo is hiding in the tunnels leading through the Sector 6 Slums. 

You can either make your way there from Sector 5, though the walk is a little long. My preferred method is taking a carriage ride to Wall Market and going through the park to the south, then back through the tunnel. 

Head into the tunnels and go through the bandit camp and past a robot hand puzzle or two. Eventually, you'll climb a ladder to see the Chocobo cowering in a corner of a tunnel.

It's here on the map.

As with the Steel Mountain Chocobo, this one has guards. Three of them to be exact, and they're tanking as can be.

Though they aren't particularly deadly, you will want to kill the additional enemies they spawn. Be aware that their stagger bar drains quickly once filled, so this is more a battle of endurance than anything else. Combo your attacks well, and you'll be set.

---

And that's how you complete the Chocobo Search sidequest in Final Fantasy VII Remake.

Check out our other content for the Remake here:

]]>
Fallout 76: How to Get Gold Bullion https://www.gameskinny.com/4ozvj/fallout-76-how-to-get-gold-bullion https://www.gameskinny.com/4ozvj/fallout-76-how-to-get-gold-bullion Thu, 16 Apr 2020 13:36:16 -0400 Ashley Shankle

Gold Bullion is the new hotness in Fallout 76, but before you can start grinding it out, you should be aware of exactly how you get this new currency and what the weekly cap is.

In order to start getting Gold Bullion, you'll first need to complete the main questline for the Wastelanders expansion. This will net you a handful of Gold Bullion out the gate, but your quest doesn't end there.

Gold Bullion is a new currency to grind over the long term, meaning you're going to be at it a while to get anything worthwhile.

How to Get Gold Bullion in Fallout 76

There are two primary methods of obtaining this new currency:

  1. Exchange Caps for Gold Bullion
  2. Press Treasury Notes into Gold Bullion

Between these two methods, you can obtain a maximum of 1,700 Gold Bullion per week.

How to Exchange Caps for Bullion

Head to The Wayward and seek out Smiley. He is willing to trade you Gold Bullion if you have the caps: 1,000 Caps, to be precise.

Smiley will trade you at an exchange rate of 1,000 Caps to 50 Gold Bullion.

His cap is 300 Gold Bullion per week, meaning you need 6,000 Caps to get the maximum amount from him each week.

How to Exchange Treasury Notes for Bullion

You'll need to do this at Gold Press Machines, which you can find easily enough at either Crater or Foundation.

Treasure Notes can be obtained by either doing public events (two Treasury Notes each) or by doing quests for either the Settlers or Raiders factions (three Treasury Notes each).

You can exchange 1 Treasury Note for 10 Gold Bullion at a Gold Press, and do so up to 200 Gold Bullion per day.

---

Getting enough Gold Bullion for something you really want can take a few weeks, so be patient and get your grind on in Fallout 76 on a daily basis to meet your goals.

Be sure to check out some of our other Fallout 76 guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Mount and Blade 2: How to Own a Settlement https://www.gameskinny.com/q22xh/mount-and-blade-2-how-to-own-a-settlement https://www.gameskinny.com/q22xh/mount-and-blade-2-how-to-own-a-settlement Thu, 16 Apr 2020 13:34:42 -0400 Sergey_3847

The further you progress through the game in Mount and Blade 2, the bigger army you will have. This guide will provide you with tips on how to own a settlement in Bannerlord, which you're going to need to manage your army.

There are two ways of achieving this goal. One is more suitable for new players than the other, but you probably should try both and find the best solution for yourself.

Besiege a Castle

The best way to own a settlement in Bannerlord is to besiege a castle. You can do this with the help of an army of troops by following these steps:

  1. Choose a castle of an enemy faction
  2. Click on the castle
  3. Select "Besiege the Castle" in the castle menu
  4. Build Siege Camp near the castle
  5. Select "Continue the Siege" in the castle menu
  6. Choose "Lead an Assault" option

This will instigate a battle, which you have to win. It is also recommended to build a Battering Ram in addition to your Siege Camp in order to increase your chances.

When the battle is over, you will automatically become the owner of your new settlement.

Become a Vassal

This is another option, which is a bit worse than actually fighting for your own castle.

If you become somebody's vassal you will not own the castle per se, but live there under the protection of your lord, who can take it from you anytime if they don't like what you're doing.

Think twice before going for this choice, although it may be a great way to own a settlement for new players, who can't afford a big army.

Follow these steps to become a vassal:

  1. Talk to any friendly noble you wish to serve
  2. Choose the following dialogue sequence:
    • "There is something I wish to discuss"
    • "I wish to be more than a mercenary. Is there a way I could pledge myself as a vassal?"
    • "I am ready"
    • "I swear homage to you as lawful king"
  3. Confirm the allegiance by selecting "I give you my word and bond"

After this dialogue, you will fight for this lord's army, and if you're lucky, you will get to live in one of the castles under the rule of this lord.

---

That's all on how to own a settlement in Bannerlord. For more Mount and Blade 2: Bannerlord guides, check out the list below:

]]>
Mount and Blade 2: Bannerlord Trade Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/z4wty/mount-and-blade-2-bannerlord-trade-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/z4wty/mount-and-blade-2-bannerlord-trade-guide Wed, 15 Apr 2020 13:45:31 -0400 Sergey_3847

Bannerlord trading is a great way to earn money for your kingdom. Aside from completing quests, hunting bandits, breaking down weapons, participating in tournaments, or becoming a mercenary, being able to trade offers a way to make denars that's mostly passive and without a lot of risk. 

As you come across items in your journey  whether you pick them up naturally, loot them, or get them from breaking down other items  trade plays a special role in bartering your way toward mounds of precious gold. 

If you're enticed by the merchant's life (or just want to get a few items off your hands for the best price possible), you'll want to min/max your character before you even start a Mount and Blade 2 campaign. 

Mount and Blade 2: Bannerlord Trading Guide

Choose Asarai as Your Culture

Before starting a new campaign, it is very important to select the right culture type. Though you will be presented with six different cultures, the Asarai is the best for trading. This choice gives you:

  • 30% bonus for building caravans
  • 10% less on trade penalties
Choose Urban Merchants as Your Family

Choose Urban Merchants family as your family. This choice gives you:

  • 10 Skill Level
  • 1 Focus point to Trade and Charm
  • 1 attribute point to Social
Choose Aptitude for Numbers for Childhood

Choose Aptitude for Numbers for childhood. This choice gives you

  • 10 Skill Level
  • 1 Focus point to Trade and Engineering
  • 1 attribute point to Intelligence
Choose Markets and Caravans for Adolescence

Choose Markets and Caravans for adolescence. This choice gives you the same extra points as Urban Merchants family:

  • 10 Skill Level
  • 1 Focus point to Trade and Charm
  • 1 attribute point to Social
Choose Invest Money in a Workshop for Adulthood

Choose Invest Money in a Workshop for adulthood. This choice gives you:

  • 10 Skill Level
  • 1 Focus point to Trade and Smithing
  • 1 attribute point to Intelligence
  • +1 to Calculating
  • +10 Renown

These choices will give you four out of five focus points at the beginning of the game, putting you well on the trader's path. 

Start Trading Goods

Before trading begins, though, you need to recruit troops to help you carry your goods. Start trading in small villages before moving into larger cities. To start trading, follow these steps:

  1. Approach the village
  2. Click on the settlement
  3. Select "Buy Products" from the menu

This will open the trade interface, with your inventory to the right. In the top right corner, you will see your carrying capacity and the amount of money you have.

The first two product types you should buy are mules and grain. Mules are needed to increase your carrying capacity, and Grain is required to feed your troops.

Find Opportunities Through Rumors and Gossip

Pay attention to rumors and gossip to find the best places to trade goods and items. 

You can find rumors in the trade menu. Hover over the price of any item, and you will see the item's availability and the rumored price in other locations. If you see numbers that you like, head over to that settlement and initiate a trade.

Gossip, on the other hand, takes a bit more time and effort to uncover because you must actually talk to people in the taverns

To enter a tavern, select "Enter the Tavern" option in the town menu. Once inside, talk to every NPC. If you see the coin icon in the dialogue menu, the NPC has information regarding profitable trade. Keep talking to them to find out where to go.

Use Item Colors to Buy Low and Sell High

In the trade menu, you will notice that some items are green, some are yellow, and some are red. Here's what each color means. 

  • Green: There is an overabundance of goods and they are relatively cheap.
  • Yellow: There is a small surplus of goods and the price is average.
  • Red: There is a shortage of goods and the items are expensive.

Buy green items and yellow items, but only buy red items if you really need them. However, always sell red items when bartering with a village or city; you will receive more money for them. 

Increase Your Trade Skill for Better Profits

Trade skill depends on your trade margin. Bannerlord gives you more XP the more profit you make during a trade.

The best way to increase your trade skill is to sell more goods than you buy. Early in the game, it's likely you will buy more goods than you sell because you need supplies to support yourself and move through the ranks. However, as you progress and your kingdom grows larger, you should make sure you sell more than you buy. 

Eventually, you will be able to loot and raid settlements, fight in battles, and participate in tournaments. Naturally, you will amass an excess of goods, which you can sell to quickly increase your trading skill.

---

That's all you need to know about Bannerlord trade. Follow the above steps and you'll be a master at trading in no time. For more Mount and Blade 2: Bannerlord guides, check out the list below:

]]>
Final Fantasy 7 Remake: All Materia Locations and What They Do https://www.gameskinny.com/m0jb8/final-fantasy-7-remake-all-materia-locations-and-what-they-do https://www.gameskinny.com/m0jb8/final-fantasy-7-remake-all-materia-locations-and-what-they-do Wed, 15 Apr 2020 13:37:52 -0400 John Schutt

There's a lot of materia in Final Fantasy VII Remake, even though the game only covers about a quarter of the story from the original. A lot of old favorites make their return, as well as new faces designed to complement the more active battle system. 

Also, like the original game, where and how you use the options at your disposal will determine your success throughout your approximately 40 hours in Midgar.

This guide will list every materia in the Remake, where you find them, and briefly describe what they do as they advance in level. There's a lot to cover, so let's get started.

Chadley

In the various hub areas (Sector 5, Wall Market, Sector 7), you'll meet a young man named Chadley, who will charge you with completing various tasks called Battle Intel Reports.

These are usually simple things like "Stagger X enemies" or "Assess X enemies." Once you finish one of the Battle Reports, he'll make unique and impossible to find materia available to you. Which materia he offers and their associated report are noted below.

Green Materia: Magic

The most basic materia in the game, in Final Fantasy VII Remake, green materia allows you to cast spells, either to damage and debuff your opponents or heal and buff yourself.

You'll find standard spells like Fire, Blizzard, and Thunder in this category, as well as costlier, more situational spells Barrier, Haste, and Raise.

Healing Materia

Casts: Cure, Cura, Regen, Curaga.

Spell Effect: Cure spells restore successively more HP per cast at the cost of longer casting time. Regen regenerates health at about 1% total HP every few seconds.

Location: Equipped to Barret at the game's start, given by Jessie at the beginning of Chapter 2, purchasable after Chapter 2 in all shops for 600 gil. 

Fire Materia

Casts: Fire, Fira, Firaga 

Spell Effect: Successively stronger fire-based attacks with proportionately longer casting time.

Location: Cloud begins the game with Fire materia. You can find an orb in the side mission Just Flew In From the Graveyard during Chapter 3. Can also be purchased from shops for 500 gil.

Ice Materia

Casts: Blizzard, Blizzara, Blizzaga

Spell Effect: Successively stronger ice-based attacks with proportionately longer casting time.

Location: You'll find your first orb of Ice materia in the Scrab Boulevard during the Chapter 3 section A Job for the Neighborhood Watch. You can also buy it for 500 gil beginning in Chapter 3.

Lightning Materia

Casts: Thunder, Thundara, Thundaga

Spell Effect: Successively stronger lightning-based attacks with proportionately longer casting time.

Location: Barret begins the game with a single orb. You can purchase more at shops throughout the game starting in Chapter 3

Wind Materia

Casts: Aero, Aerora, Aeroga

Spell Effect: Successively stronger wind-based attacks with proportionately longer casting time. High stagger damage on aerial opponents.

Location: Complete Battle Intel 2 for Chadley, which requires you to hit enemies with an element they're weak to, then purchase the Wind materia for 100 gil. Subsequent purchases will be 2,000 gil.

Poison Materia

Casts: Bio, Biora, Bioga

Spell Effect: Successively stronger poison-based attacks with proportionately longer casting time. Has a chance to poison the target.

Location: Poison becomes purchasable shops throughout the game starting in Chapter 5 after you defeat the Queen Grashtrike. It costs 1,500 gil.

Cleansing Materia

Casts: Poisona, Esuna, Resist

Spell Effect: Poisona cures poison (obviously). Esuna cures most detrimental effects. Resist improves your resistance to detrimental effects.

Location: You can purchase the cleansing materia for 300 gil after completing the Rat Problem sidequest in Sector 7. Alternatively, you can buy it for the same price starting in Chapter 5.

Revival Materia

Casts: Raise and Arise 

Spell Effect: Raise revives downed party members with a small amount of HP. Arise revives them with most of their HP.

Location: Afte the second Roche SOLDIER fight in Chapter 4, Revival will be on the ground. You have to try to miss it.

Barrier Materia

Casts: Barrier, Manaward, Manawall

Spell Effect: Barrier lowers physical damage. Manaward lowers magic damage. Manawall lowers both. 

Location: Jessie will give Cloud the Barrier Materia at the "Remaining Payment" portion of Chapter 4.

Binding Materia

Casts: Sleep, Silence, Berserk

Spell Effect: Sleep puts enemies to Sleep if it connects. Silence prevents them from using magic. Berserk forces them to only use physical attacks.

Location: You'll find the Binding materia at the second robot hand puzzle in Sector 6, shortly after you meet up with Aerith.

Subversion Materia

Casts: Breach, Dispel

Spell Effect: Breach removes barrier-type spells like Barrier and Manawall. Dispel removes continuous effects, but not barriers. 

Location: You'll receive Subversion as a reward for defeating the Ghoul boss at in Chapter 11. 

Time Materia

Casts: Haste, Slow, Stop 

Spell Effect: Haste increases the rate you gain ATB. Slow and Stop slow and stop enemies respectively for a period of time.

Location: Time materia sits in the Drum facility during Chapter 17. You can also acquire an orb of Time by completing the Missing Children sidequest in Chapter 14.

Purple Materia: Complete

Complete materia, previously known as Independent materia, has no activated effect and does not modify materia linked to it. It either generates a passive buff to the equipped character or allows for a specific trigger ability.

HP Up Materia

Effect: Increases character HP by 10%, increasing to a maximum of 50%. Equipping two increases the max HP improvement to +100%.

Location: You'll find HP Up at the end of a dead-end alley on Loveless Street where you meet Aerith in Chapter 2.

MP Up Materia

Effect: Increases character MP by 10%, increasing to a maximum of 50%. Equipping two increases the max MP improvement to +100%.

Location: You find MP Up sitting atop a construction platform on the H-01 platform in Chapter 6, the section before the second reactor bombing run. You'll have powered down two plate lamps, and you'll need to run past the third and down a ladder. Manipulate the crane to move the platform down to reach the materia. It becomes purchasable for 2,000 gil after that.

Item Master Materia

Effect: Increases the effectiveness of items used in battle, up to 30%.

Location: Chadley's Battle Report 11, which requires you to Assess 20 enemy types.

Magic Up Materia

Effect: Increases a character's magic power by increments of 5%, up to 25%. Multiple copies of the materia can take the bonus to 100%.

Location: During the second reactor section, you'll need to manipulate levers in sync with Barret and Tifa to progress. Then, to open the nearby vault, you have to do it again, four times. Succeeding there will open the vault where you can pick up the materia.

Luck Up Materia

Effect: Increases your Luck stat by increments of 10%, to a maximum of 50% with a single orb equipped. More than one orb equipped increases the maximum bonus to 100%. The Luck stat increases the probability of stealing and receiving rare items in combat.

Location: If you can claim the top spot on the Darts leaderboard by the end of Chapter 4, Wedge will give you the materia. Doing so requires you to take the score from 300 to 0 in seven darts.

Gil Up Materia

Effect: Increases the gil you earn in battle by 100%.

Location: Complete the Two-Person Team vs. High Flyers" VR battle challenge in Shinra Tower during Chapters 16 and 17.

EXP Up Materia

Effect: Increases the experience  (EXP) you earn in battle by 100%.

Location: Complete the Three-Person Team vs. High Flyers" VR battle challenge in Shinra Tower during Chapters 16 and 17.

Deadly Dodge Materia

Effect: Adds a follow-up attack just after you dodge. The upgrade increases the potency of the attack.

Location: In chapter 2, on Loveless Street, after you defeat the Guards and their Guard Dogs. You can also purchase it in Chapter 4 for 600 gil.

Parry Materia

Effect: Increases the damage dealt via parry attacks and slightly increases the ATB once activated.

Location: Chadley offers this materia for sale after you complete Battle Report 12, which requires you to increase your stagger damage bonus to 200%.

Auto-Cure Materia

Effect: Enables AI-controlled party members to cast Cure spells a certain number of times per combat when character HP drops low. At base, it casts cure three times, upgraded ten times.

Location: Your first assignment from Chadley asks you to Assess two monsters. Once completed (the first Battle Report), he'll sell you the Auto-Cure materia for 100 gil.

Steadfast Block Materia

Effect: This materia reduces the damage you take while blocking and increases the ATB gauge gain while blocking. The amount of both depends on the materia's upgrade level.

Location: Complete Battle Report 6 for Chadley, which requires you to assess 10 enemy types. Purchase for 100 gil.

ATB Stagger Materia

Effect: Gives a boost to your ATB gauge on staggering a foe. The boost gets bigger, depending on the materia's upgrade level.

Location: Complete Battle Report 14 for Chadley.

 

Provoke Materia

Effect: Forces enemies to focus on a particular, AI-controlled character if their teammates are injured. Does not work on powerful enemies and bosses. Higher levels reduce the cooldown.

Location: Complete Chadley's Battle Report 5, which requires you to defear three monsters of different varieties, and purchase for 100 gil.

ATB Assist Materia

Effect: Increases teammate ATB gauges when the controlled character uses their ATB. The increase size depends on the level.

Location: Complete Chadley's Battle Report 8, which requires you to trigger Refocus twice, and purchase for 100 gil.

Skill Master Materia

Effect: Gives a boost to the ATB gauge when using three different ATB commands successively.

Location: Complete Chadley's Battle Report 17 and purchase for 100 gil.

First Strike Materia

Effect: Gives a proportional increase to ATB at the start of a battle based on the materia's level.

Location: Complete Battle Report 3 (use unique abilities on staggered enemies to charge your ATB 10 times) for Chadley and purchase for 100 gil.

Refocus Materia

Effect: Allows the use of the Refocus limit break, usable once per battle. 

Location: Comes equipped to Aerith by default, and as a reward for the VR challenges Two-Person Team vs. Dynamic Duos or Three-Person Team vs. Monsters of Legend in Shinra Tower.

Blue Materia: Support

The backbone of any solid materia combination, Support materia is only really useful when connected to Magic materia through linked slots. Each augments either the function of the connected materia or changes moment to moment combat in some way. Elemental materia, for instance, can empower your weapon with Fire, Ice, or Lightning; Magnify empowers the spell itself, and so on.

Elemental Materia

Effect: Adds the connected element to your weapon and reduces the damage taken from that weapon. Damage and reduction increase with materia level.

Location: During the Sun Lamps section of Chapter 6, when you're on your way to the final lamp, go past the lamp platform and down the ladder. You'll see Elemental sitting at the end of a bridge that collapsed earlier in the mission.

Warding Materia

Effect: Reduces the effectiveness of harmful status ailments. The reduction depends on the materia level.

Location: You'll find Warding materia in the sewers in Chapter 10 and the Underground Lab in Chapter 13.

Synergy Materia

Effect: Allows an AI-controlled teammate to use the same linked spell as the battle leader.

Location: Complete Battle Report 9 and purchase from Chadley for 100 gil.

MP Absorption Materia

Effect: Allows you to recover MP when unleashing an attack of the linked materia's type.

Location: Chadley's Battle Report 18, which requires you to master all 13 types of magic materia. Buy for 100 gil.

HP Absorption Materia

Effect: Restores a portion of HP based on the element or command of the linked materia. HP restored starts at 20% and goes to 40% at max upgrade.

Location: Complete Battle Report 19 and purchase from Chadley for 100 gil.

Pedometer and AP Up Materia

Effect: Once you walk 5,000 steps, the Pedometer Materia will morph into AP Up. Linked materia will receive increased AP by 100%, decreasing their upgrade time.

Location: Pedometer sits right outside Aerith's house in Chapter 14.

 

Magnify Materia

Effect: Expands the range of linked materia, allowing it to jump between enemies. Secondary casts have reduced damage. The damage reduction decreases with materia level.

Location: Magnify lives near the third robot arm puzzle in Chapter 9.

Yellow Materia: Command

As the name suggests, Command materia adds additional actions you can take in battle. These live in the Abilities submenu and require ATB charges. Their effect is usually minor but can be influential if used correctly.

Assess Materia

Effect: The first piece of Command materia you're likely to acquire, Assess allows you to look at a detailed drill-down of enemy stats. The effect includes bosses.

Location: Receive from Chadley the first time you meet him.

Enemy Skill Materia

Effect: Allows you to learn various Enemy Skill abilities, attacks, buffs, and debuffs unique to monsters around the world. Use Assess to see if there is a skill to learn.

Location: Chadley's Battle Report 16, which requires you to learn 16 weapon abilities, and buy for 100 gil.

Steal Materia

Effect: Allows you to Steal items from enemies. Use Assess to see what you have a chance to steal.

Location: Chadley's Battle Report 7, which requires you to exploit the weaknesses of 15 enemy types. Buy for 100 gil.

ATB Boost Materia

Effect: With L1 + R1, you activate the skill to double the ATB gauge. The cooldown reduces with materia level.

Location: Complete Chadley's Battle Report 4, requiring you to stagger 15 enemy types. Buy for 100 gil.

Prayer Materia

Effect: Restores an amount of HP to a single party member. The amount healed depends on materia level. 

Location: Aerith comes equipped with one orb of Prayer. There is also one behind Corneo's stash door during the Chapter 14 quest Corneo's Secret Stash.

Chakra Materia

Effect: Restores HP based on the amount of damage a character's taken. The amount restored increases with materia level.

Location: Chakra comes equipped to Tifa by default.

Red Materia: Summon

Summoning materia does just that: summon powerful beings to assist you at specific points in certain battles. Acquiring some of them is a fairly involved process — involved enough that we have our own guide on it.

Check it out right here: 

Final Fantasy 7 Remake Summons and Where to Find Them

We've got plenty of other Final Fantasy 7 Remake guides right now and on the way, so stay tuned.

]]>
Mount and Blade 2: Bannerlord Cheats — How to Activate Them https://www.gameskinny.com/kjkrs/mount-and-blade-2-bannerlord-cheats-how-to-activate-them https://www.gameskinny.com/kjkrs/mount-and-blade-2-bannerlord-cheats-how-to-activate-them Tue, 14 Apr 2020 11:38:00 -0400 Sergey_3847

Though Warband players had easy access to cheat commands, Bannerlord cheats are only available in a very limited respect. The Mount and Blade 2 cheats list just isn't all that big. However, you can get more by using a mod.

Below, we go over how to access the in-game dev console to activate the cheats available in Bannerlord itself. We then look at a mod that lets you access even more cheats — lots more. 

Mount and Blade 2 Cheats — How to Activate Them

Activate the Developer Console

This first method allows you to activate a few basic cheats without too much work. All you need to do to activate the cheats is:

  • Go to "Documents\Mount and Blade II Bannerlord\Configs" folder
  • Find and open “engine_config.txt” file
  • Search for “cheat_mode = 0” line
  • Change it to “cheat_mode = 1
  • Save and close the file

This will activate the following cheats:

  • Ctrl+H: Restores full health.
  • Ctrl+Shift+H: Restores full health of your horse.
  • Ctrl+F4: Renders enemy unconscious.
  • Ctrl+Shift+F4: Renders all enemies unconscious.
  • Ctrl+F2: Knocks out one of your own soldiers.
  • Ctrl+F3: Knocks out the player.
  • Ctrl+Shift+F3: Renders your horse unconscious.

Note: These cheats will only work in the new campaign.

Get the Developer Console Cheats Mod

If the cheats above don't satisfy your needs, then download and install the following mod:

The mod page has a complete list of all the cheats available after installing this mod  and it's huge! It includes (but is not limited to): 

  • Player trait options
  • Settlement options
  • Workshop options
  • Tournament options
  • Conversation options

You can also tweak a plethora of system settings, such as screenshot format, lens flares, textures, physics, sounds, and much more. 

---

That's it on how to get and activate Bannerlord cheats. For more Mount and Blade 2: Bannerlord guides, check out the list below:

]]>
MtG: 15 Best Ikoria Lair of Behemoths Cards for Standard https://www.gameskinny.com/hnr1i/mtg-15-best-ikoria-lair-of-behemoths-cards-for-standard https://www.gameskinny.com/hnr1i/mtg-15-best-ikoria-lair-of-behemoths-cards-for-standard Mon, 13 Apr 2020 13:51:26 -0400 Sergey_3847

[{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/1/2/212-361c3.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/1/2/212-361c3.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209598","description":"

Titans' Nest

\n

Titans' Nest is somewhat of an anomaly. There are already plenty of ramp producers in Standard, but this card takes things to another level.

\n

Here is one possible combo that won't break the game but will make it a lot of fun:

\n
    \n
  1. Play one of the Tri or Dual lands
  2. \n
  3. Cast Growth Spiral
  4. \n
  5. Cast Titans' Nest
  6. \n
  7. Cast Nyxbloom Ancient
  8. \n
\n

That's a turn-four creature that costs 7 mana and positions you for even more dramatic plays. 

\n

---

\n

In addition to this list of the best Ikoria Lair of Behemoths cards for Standard, be sure to check out our other MtG guides here

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/2/6/226-52c53.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/2/6/226-52c53.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209597","description":"

Lurrus of the Dream-Den

\n

Currently, there are potentially three well-established archetypes that would want to use Lurrus's abilities.

\n

The first one is Mono-White Weenies, which will gain a lot by putting a full playset into their main decks. The second one is Rakdos Aggro, which use Lurrus to bring back Dreadhorde Butcher and Kroxa from the dead.

\n

Lastly, Orzhov Aristocrats with Command the Dreadhorde would benefit nicely from this card. 

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/3/3/233-565c7.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/3/3/233-565c7.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209596","description":"

Zirda, the Dawnwaker

\n

Since Ikoria brings the Cycling mechanic back in a big way, Zirda will work as the main Cycling enabler in the current meta.

\n

It would be an excellent companion to Zenith Flare, a new instant spell that deals damage to any target equal to the number of cards with Cycling in your graveyard.

\n

Use Bag of Holding to quickly parse through your deck of cards with Cycling and end up insta-killing your opponent as soon as your graveyard contains 20 cards with Cycling.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/9/8/198-69507.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/9/8/198-69507.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209595","description":"

Offspring's Revenge

\n

The first card that comes to mind when reading the rule text for Offspring's Revenge is Drakuseth, Maw of Flames. It can easily deal 5 damage to an opponent and deal with another creature or planeswalker for free.

\n

But that's just a tiny glimpse at the possibilities available with Offspring's Revenge. Though other gods will do the trick, this enchantment will most likely end up serving decks that run God-Eternals such as Bontu or Kefnet. 

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/4/8/148-53fac.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/4/8/148-53fac.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209594","description":"

Colossification

\n

Sotrm Herald from Theros Beyond Death may have just found a new friend. These two can do some real damage.

\n

The combo with Colossification will look something like this:

\n
    \n
  1. Play Merfolk Secretkeeper
  2. \n
  3. Keep milling yourself until you put a copy of Colossification into your graveyard
  4. \n
  5. Play Kiora, Behemoth Beckoner
  6. \n
  7. Play Storm Herald
  8. \n
  9. Attach Colossification to Storm Herald
  10. \n
  11. Untap Storm Herald using Kiora's minus ability
  12. \n
  13. Attack for a total of 23 damage
  14. \n
\n

If there are no blockers in place, you will instantly win the game.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/0/4/204-c8f66.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/0/4/204-c8f66.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209593","description":"

Ruinous Ultimatum

\n

Although the cost of this incredibly powerful sweeper is a bit steep, it will do just fine in Fires of Invention decks.

\n

The trend for these supremely-strong AoE effects has been set some time ago, and with the gradual power creep of all standard sets, it's no surprise that Ruinous Ultimatum is so wicked.

\n

It literally deals with everything except lands and indestructible permanents.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/2/5/125-30029.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/2/5/125-30029.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209592","description":"

Lukka, Coppercoat Outcast

\n

Lukka does a lot for a mono-color planeswalker. Its first two abilities allow you to search through your library for specific creatures. It's a bit too expensive for Mono-Red Aggro lists, but Gruul decks that run a lot of expensive beasts should snatch several copies of Lukka.

\n

The ultimate ability is borderline OP and obviously game-winning. It can be used equally well against token decks that block combat attacks and fog effects.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/2/0/220-1581d.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/2/0/220-1581d.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209591","description":"

Fiend Artisan

\n

This is another variant that utilizes its ability to put creatures of certain mana cost onto the battlefield. You may have seen something similar in the combo decks with Prime Speaker Vannifar.

\n

This effect will be extremely strong, as it's cheaper than Vannifar by 2 mana. That means there are going to be lots of decks based on Fiend Artisan this season.

\n

Just don't forget about the existence of Ashiok, Dream Render, which makes Fiend Artisan's ability completely useless.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/9/0/190-5ac62.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/9/0/190-5ac62.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209590","description":"

Illuna, Apex of Wishes

\n

The new Mutate mechanic is definitely one of the most unusual ones in the recent history of Magic: The Gathering.

\n

It doesn't always make things better, but the effects it creates are just too good to pass up, especially for cards like Illuna, Apex of Wishes. When you get to put any non-land permanent onto the battlefield for free from the top of your library, it's a huge win. 

\n

Taking into account the mana base of Illune, you have a very good chance of turning the tides of all current Temur lists.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/0/2/0/020-935a1.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/0/2/0/020-935a1.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209589","description":"

Light of Hope

\n

This 1-mana instant spell is absolutely amazing (and it has some of the prettiest artwork we've ever seen!).

\n

Light of Hope is very flexible and will certainly make it into the sideboard of either Mono-White Lifegain or Blue-White Control decks. There are simply no downsides to it.

\n

Is this a must-have card? Absolutely not. But it's a very good common card, and it's probably the best common card in Ikoria.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/3/7/237-a6c22.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/3/7/237-a6c22.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209588","description":"

The Ozolith

\n

This funky little artifact can do a lot of damage if not taken care of in time. Pair it with Yorvo, Lord of Garenbrig for some crazy shenanigans.

\n

Yorvo isn't the only option these days, but it looks to be the coolest one. Consider cards like Dreadhorde Invasion, Simic Ascendancy, Steel Overseer, and Soul Diviner.

\n

If you collect a ton of counters on The Ozolith, you can animate it with the help of Karn, the Great Creator's ability and push a ton of damage. This may just be the strongest card in the set, a true hidden gem!

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/9/5/195-ceb10.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/9/5/195-ceb10.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209587","description":"

Narset of the Ancient Way

\n

This a planeswalker with a justifiable mana cost. You get four loyalty counters for 4 mana, with three equally strong abilities. Sure, it requires three different colors, but Jeskai players will have no problem with that.

\n

Narset isn't the strongest planeswalker out there, but it's a solid one that can do more than meets the eye.

\n

This card's ultimate ability is similar to Chandra's, which allows you to kill any opponent that is not protected by the Hexproof mechanic, a great win condition.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/8/1/181-6ae2a.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/8/1/181-6ae2a.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209586","description":"

Chevill, Bane of Monsters

\n

Anti-aggro strategies are welcome in any meta. This legendary human creature is really good not only for blocking but also for regaining some life and drawing some cards.

\n

Obviously, Chevill won't be very good many other match-ups; it's clearly a sideboard card. But it will save your life in games against Mono-Red Aggro and Rakdos Aristocrats.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/0/7/207-2cb06.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/0/7/207-2cb06.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209584","description":"

Skycat Sovereign

\n

This is a functional reprint of the Pride of the Clouds, a seminal Modern card from the unfairly forgotten Dissension expansion. There has also been a limited reprint in the Guild Kits for the Ravnica Allegiance set.

\n

The only difference here is that creating tokens is now a bit easier and doesn't require you reveal another copy of Skycat Sovereign from your hand.

\n

In any case, this is a clear contender for the Blue-White Flyers deck, which will definitely find its place in Standard format this season.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/7/5/175-2fc16.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/7/5/175-2fc16.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209580","description":"

Vivien, Monsters' Advocate

\n

Any great planeswalker can be recognized by the synergy between its abilities. In this case, a static ability is well supported by the -2 ability, which allows you to shuffle your library if you don't like what you see.

\n

Although the 5 mana cost may seem a bit steep for a planeswalker with only three initial counters, both static abilities totally make up for that.

\n

Vivien's +1 ability isn't bad either and gives you several choices for your 3/3 creatures, providing flexibility.

"},{"image":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/untitled-a66bc.jpg","thumb":"https://res.cloudinary.com/lmn/image/upload/c_limit,h_85,w_97/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/untitled-a66bc.jpg","type":"slide","id":"209599","description":"

The brand-new Magic: The Gathering set, Ikoria Lair of Behemoths, includes 274 cards and focuses on monster creatures. The theme of the set inspired the mechanic Mutate, which allows players to combine different types of non-human creatures into something new and unexpected.

\n

Ikoria also introduces Companion cards that can be played from outside of the main deck. The Cycling mechanic makes a big comeback as well.

\n

This list contains 15 of the best new MtG cards for Standard format, so you can prepare before the set goes online and appears during official tournaments.

"}]]]>
Final Fantasy 7 Remake Summons and Where to Find Them https://www.gameskinny.com/vuq3i/final-fantasy-7-remake-summons-and-where-to-find-them https://www.gameskinny.com/vuq3i/final-fantasy-7-remake-summons-and-where-to-find-them Mon, 13 Apr 2020 13:26:35 -0400 Joshua Broadwell

Final Fantasy 7 Remake includes a number of powerful summons, though not quite as many as you might be used to. Still, many of the classic Final Fantasy summons are available throughout the story, with a handful locked to those who pre-ordered the deluxe versions of the game. Our Final Fantasy 7 Remake summons guide details them all and what you need to do to get them.

Because not everyone will have the DLC summons, we aren't going into them here.

We'll first go over how to use summons, then how to get Ifrit, Chocobo, Shiva, Fat Chocobo, Leviathan, and Bahamut — in that order. 

Final Fantasy 7 Remake Summons: How to Use Them

Using summons in FF7 Remake is simple. Each character has a summon Materia slot in their Materia grid. It's independent of their weapon and armor slots. That means you don't have to worry about using one of those with a summon. You also need to make sure everyone in your party has a summon equipped.

Most summons have an elemental affinity of some kind as well, so they're highly useful for targeting weaknesses — especially since they don't cost ATB or MP to use.

However, you won't be able to use a summon creature in every battle. You'll have to be in a battle where you either take a lot of damage or the battle lasts longer than usual. That usually ends up being boss fights or mini-boss fights.

When you can use a summon, a purple meter appears on the right, above the character stat bars. Once it's full, you'll just choose the summon from the commands menu like you would any skill for your characters.

The summon attacks for you, but you can still be targeted; summons disappear after a while or if the character attached to them gets knocked out. Each summon has a role in its stat screen, but the main ones all have the same role anyway: attacking.

Final Fantasy 7 Remake: How to Get Ifrit

  • Role: Damage dealer
  • Element: Fire
  • Ultimate Attack: Hellfire

Ifrit is the first summon you'll get in the game, and you don't have to do anything for it. Jessie gives Ifrit to you around the end of Chapter 3, along with a tutorial for how to equip and use summon Materia.

Final Fantasy 7 Remake: How to Get Chocobo

  • Role: Damage dealer
  • Element: Wind (Chocobo); None (Moogle)
  • Ultimate Attack: Stampede (Wind)

The Chocobo summon is actually a dual summon, featuring the adorable Chocobo and Moogle combo shown off in pre-release trailers. You'll come across it in Chapter 6, but it takes some work to get.

The Chocobo and Moogle summon is in the chapter's dungeon, in the part where you have to shut lamps off. After you shut the third lamp off, ignore the objective prompt and go past that point to the elevator. Take it down to the ventilation chamber, and get your party ready.

You'll press a button to turn the fans off — and have one minute to deal with a bunch of lasers (weak to Lightning) and a Gashstrike. It's weak to ice, so try and make sure you have at least one party member who can deal ice damage and try to inflict Stagger to deal the most damage.

After you've cleared the room, go to the terminal to the right of where you entered. Interact with the button by using "Triangle," and the timer shuts off. Now you can go and grab the red Chocobo summon Materia.

Final Fantasy 7 Remake: Shiva

  • Role: Damage dealer
  • Element: Ice
  • Ultimate Attack: Diamond Dust

The remaining summons are obtained in a different way. You'll need to complete the first four of Chadley's Battle Reports. These unlock fairly early, once you get to Sector 7's slums. You'll need to meet certain requirements in battle to complete each report. 

In Chapter 8, Battle Intel Report 5 becomes available. It's straightforward: defeat Shiva in a VR simulation battle. As you'd expect, Shiva is weak to Fire attacks, so bring those and Ifrit.

Final Fantasy 7 Remake: Fat Chocobo

  • Role: Damage dealer
  • Element: None
  • Ultimate Attack: Kerplunk

Next up is Fat Chocobo. You'll need to complete Battle Intel Reports 6-9 and be in Chapter 9. Chadley accompanies you to Wall Market, so you can access the Battle Intel Reports there. Intel Report 10 is just like the fifth one: face off against Fat Chocobo in a simulated battle.

Fat Chocobo doesn't have any specific weaknesses. Just try to dodge the slam attack, and bring your best game.

Final Fantasy 7 Remake: Leviathan

  • Role: Damage dealer
  • Element: None
  • Ultimate Attack: Tidal Wave

Complete Battle Intel Reports 11-14, and Chadley offers Battle Intel Report 15. It's the same routine as before: fight Leviathan. The main difference this time is that Leviathan is so much stronger than Fat Chocobo.

Leviathan is a water creature, so it's weak to Lightning (even though it's officially "non-elemental"). Try to guard when it unleashes its Tidal Wave attack, keep the party's HP as high as you can at all times, and have at least one party member equipped with Barrier Materia. Tidal Wave is technically a physical attack, so keep that in mind.

Final Fantasy 7 Remake: Bahamut

  • Role: Damage dealer
  • Element: None
  • Ultimate Attack: Megaflare

You know the drill already. Complete the next four Battle Intel Reports, and you'll fight the ultimate Final Fantasy summon: Bahamut. There's a bit of a twist with this because you'll need to master most of the game's Materia and weapon skills.

Once you've done that, talk to Chadley again. Definitely have Barrier Materia equipped for this fight, and make sure you're using Aerith's Pray ability to restore the party's HP; that's the best bet to surviving Megaflare. Otherwise, fight hard, and you'll eventually take Bahamut down.

---

That's it for our Final Fantasy 7 Remake summons guide. Stay tuned to GameSkinny for our Final Fantasy 7 Remake review, and check out our other Final Fantasy 7 Remake guides too, including:

]]>
Resident Evil 3 Weapons and Weapon Mods: All Locations https://www.gameskinny.com/mzpdi/resident-evil-3-weapons-and-weapon-mods-all-locations https://www.gameskinny.com/mzpdi/resident-evil-3-weapons-and-weapon-mods-all-locations Sat, 11 Apr 2020 15:11:07 -0400 Thomas Wilde

Two in-game Records, Kendo’s Protege and Kendo’s Armory, require you to find all Resident Evil 3 weapons and weapon mods (parts). There are 10 of each spread throughout the game’s story mode. You also receive the Record Gunsmith the first time you install a weapon mod.

Of the two, Kendo’s Armory is more or less a gimme. Let's cover that one first.

Note that this does not contain other weapons you can buy from the shop, such as the Hot Dogger (7,200p), the Samurai Edge (5,600p), the MUP Pistol (8,000p), the Rai-Den (12,000p), the CQBR Assault Rifle (28,400p), or the Rocket Launcher (62,400p). 

Kendo's Armory: All 10 Baseline Weapon Locations 

You receive credit for four of the 10 baseline weapons necessary for the trophy/achievement automatically. These are the G19 handgun, survival knife, Carlos’ G18 handgun, and the assault rifle. Both the hand grenade and flash grenade count towards your total as well.

M3 Shotgun and Grenade Launcher

The M3 shotgun is found in the subway control room’s front office, in a locker that you need the bolt cutters to open.

The MGL grenade launcher is in the office safe room in the sewer.

If you miss either or both of them, they’re scripted to reappear twice throughout the campaign, once in the dilapidated storage room and again in the underground storage area’s office.

G18 Handgun

The G18 handgun can be found on the counter in the hospital’s lobby after Jill wakes up. Its big advantage over the modded G17 is that it’s capable of burst fire, which can come in handy.

.44 Lightning Hawk

The only really hidden weapon in the RE3 campaign, on Assisted or Standard difficulties, is the .44 Lightning Hawk, this game’s take on the traditional Resident Evil high-caliber hand cannon.

Once you finish Carlos’ run through the hospital and regain control of Jill, don’t run straight into the underground storage area. Instead, go back to the hospital’s second floor. You may have noticed a blockade in the second floor’s hallway with a conspicuously small crawl space in it, but Carlos won’t even try to get through it.

Jill, however, will slide right through it, where you can reach another broken window. Jump through it to find a dead Umbrella mercenary and a briefcase, which contains the Lightning Hawk.

If you’re playing on Nightmare difficulty or above, however, you can just pick the Lightning Hawk up from the UBCS equipment stash in the subway station control room. It’s there to give you a convenient way to deal with “Pale Head” zombies, which regenerate quickly unless you blow their heads off with a high-caliber weapon.

Once you’re fully equipped, it does take a little more work to find all of the base weapons’ extra parts.

Kendo's Protege: All 10 Weapon Mods (Parts)

When you collect all 10 weapon mods, you unlock the Kendo’s Protege Record. This is worth 600 points for you to spend in the Shop, and makes the in-game model of Robert Kendo available for your collection in the Bonuses menu.

#1: Front Dot Sight (Handgun)

Open the safe in the storage room above the drugstore. The combination (Right 9, Left 3, Right 7) is hinted at in a nearby file and can be found by checking the circled numbers on the Aqua Cure ad on the wall of the drugstore.

#2: Tactical Stock (Shotgun)

Plug at least two gems into the monument in the subway station safe room.

There are a total of three gems, which can be found inside Fancy Boxes; those, in turn, are found in the back room at Moon’s Donuts, the supermarket, and the Toy Uncle store. You’ll need the bolt cutters and lockpick to get the second and third, respectively.

#3: Extended Magazine (Handgun)

Knock Nemesis to his knees when he catches up to you outside the electrical substation. One hand grenade will do the trick. He’ll drop a supply case that contains this mod.

As was the case in the original Resident Evil 2, installing the Extended Magazine mod also magically refills the handgun to its new maximum capacity. You may want to use up the rest of its currently loaded ammo before you switch to the new magazine.

#4: Moderator (Handgun)

After obtaining the Extended Magazine, make your way back to the subway control room and plot a course. When you leave the building, Nemesis will eventually catch back up to you. Incapacitate him again and he’ll drop a second supply case, this one containing a moderator for your handgun.

This makes the handgun big enough that it takes up an additional inventory slot, in exchange for boosting the weapon's critical rate. 

#5: Semi-Auto Barrel (Shotgun)

Check the shelves near the door in Kendo’s gun shop.

#6: Scope (Assault Rifle)

As Carlos, take Brad out in the RPD courtyard and take his I.D. card. It can be used to open three strongboxes found throughout the RPD. One of them, found in the west office, contains this mod for Carlos’ rifle.

#7: Tactical Grip (Assault Rifle)

As Carlos, when you reach the second floor of the hospital, use the southwestern broken window to jump down to the courtyard. You’ll end up in an otherwise-inaccessible part of the yard, where you can grab this mod out of a flower pot.

#8: Dual Magazine (Assault Rifle)

As Carlos, open the safe in the nurses’ station on the second floor of the hospital. The combination (9 clockwise, 3 counter-clockwise) can be found in the RE: Lost Items file in the hospital’s operating room.

Notably, you can’t get this mod if you’re playing as Jill, even if you have an assault rifle (i.e., the one you get if you’re playing on Assisted difficulty).

#9: Shell Loader (Shotgun)

Check the small alcove behind the lift in the southeastern corner of the warehouse. You’ll find this mod in a briefcase.

#10: Extended Barrel (Magnum)

Look behind the main console in the warehouse control room.

---

That's it for our Resident Evil 3 weapons and weapon mods guide. Now you know the locations of each weapon and weapon part, excluding those you have to purchase in the shop. For more on Resident Evil 3, be sure to head over to our guides hub for more walkthroughs and tips. 

]]>
Resident Evil 3 Files Guide: All File Locations https://www.gameskinny.com/vl8vy/resident-evil-3-files-guide-all-file-locations https://www.gameskinny.com/vl8vy/resident-evil-3-files-guide-all-file-locations Sat, 11 Apr 2020 14:16:05 -0400 Thomas Wilde

If you're wondering how to get all of the files in Resident Evil 3, you've come to the right place. Just as in last year's Resident Evil 2, finding all of the Resident Evil 3 files will give you the Bookworm trophy/achievement, as well as a Record.

There are 56 files in Resident Evil 3, and when you find one for the first time, you'll need to scroll all the way through its pages to the end to get credit for discovering it. Many of them also contain useful information like safe combinations or key item locations, so it's worth keeping your eyes open for them.

As with other collectibles in RE3, your file-collecting progress is saved directly to your profile on the spot whenever you find and read a new one. You do not have to find and read all 56 files throughout a single run through the game. However, the game is very linear, so you only have one shot at collecting most of these files before they become unavailable for the rest of that run.

Notably, the four "tutorial" files that you gradually unlock as you play through the first stretch of the game are stored in your Files menu, but they do not count towards this record.

Please note that this guide to collecting all 56 files will unavoidably contain minor spoilers for the game's later locations and fights. You're better off using this to clean up after you've already beaten the game at least once.

This list of the files is numbered in rough accordance with the order in which they appear in the game, for organization's sake. This order bears no resemblance at all to the order in which they're stored in your in-game inventory menu.

If you're down to your last few files for your collection, the hardest ones to find are arguably #18, #22, #26, #34, and especially #56.

Resident Evil 3 Files Guide: All Files and File Locations

File #1: Jill's Report

Once you wake up in Jill's apartment at the start of the game, flip the light switch next to her pinboard, then check the envelope next to it on the wall.

File #2: Investigation Notes

This file is found right next to file #1 on Jill's pinboard.

File #3: Unsealed Envelope

Pick up the letter on top of Jill's dresser.

File #4: Message from a Colleague

Read the piece of paper next to the open pizza box in Jill's kitchenette.

File #5: U.B.C.S. Ammo Crafting Manual

After you've met Mikhail and left the subway car, open the UBCS-branded three-ring binder on the bench.

File #6: Tabloid Front Page

Check the newsstand on your way up to the subway station safe room.

File #7: U.B.C.S. Herb Field Manual

Open the binder on the table in the middle of the subway station safe room.

File #8: Drugstore Owner's Journal

Use the walkway near Moon's Donuts to reach the storage room above the drugstore, and read the open book next to the safe.

File #9: Subway Employee's Memo

Look on the desk in the front office of the subway control center. This file is next to the locker that contains the shotgun.

File #10: Kite Bros. Railway Manual

Check the chair next to the main console in the subway control center.

File #11: Training Log

Check Murphy's body in the garage.

File #12: U.B.C.S. Suicide Note

When you leave the garage, turn right to find a dead mercenary at the end of the alley. He's got this note and a handful of bullets on him.

File #13: Electrician's Notice

Leave the garage and turn left. You should spot this file taped to the wall at eye level. It's a tutorial message about all the conspicuously sparking generator boxes you've seen lying around the streets.

File #14: Fax from Substation Chief

Check the desk in the electrical substation control room.

File #15: Green Herbs: They Work!

As you leave the substation control room, go downstairs and look for the two potted green herbs. This note's in the open book lying next to them.

File #16: Substation Internal Memo

Read the note taped to the wall next to the door to the substation's breaker room.

File #17: Chad's Notes

When you reach the gangplank above the substation's breaker room, look for this note next to the cocooned dead guy.

File #18: Your Charlie Doll

Check the poster on the wall near the front window inside Toy Uncle. You'll need the lockpick to get inside.

File #19: Increased Sewer Security

This file is taped to the wall next to the battery-locked exit door in the sewers.

File #20: Invoice from Gun Shop Kendo

When you find the grenade launcher in the office in the sewer, this is right next to it on top of a stepladder.

File #21: Research Assistant's Logs

Look on the desk next to file #20, in the office in the sewer.

File #22: Sewer Worker's Notes

This is one of the easiest files to miss. There's a T-intersection before the laboratory in the sewers, but the right-hand fork is seemingly blocked by a "waterfall." This isn't actually a barrier, however, and you can walk right through it to find this file at the end of the tunnel, along with a dead guy, some shotgun shells, and a crate with some Gunpowder in it.

File #23: A Love Letter?

Check the desk near the lockers in the lab in the sewers.

File #24: Notice of Demolition Delay

Near the roof of the construction site, in the ersatz safe room just before your first real fight with Nemesis, you can find this note next to the typewriter.

File #25: Raccoon Times Reader's Column

When you pass through the house behind Kendo's gun shop, climb the stairs to the second floor and read the folded newspaper on the bed.

File #26: Email Outbox

Before you enter the R.P.D. as Carlos, go downstairs to the night watchman's room – you may remember this as the same room from Resident Evil 2, where you found your bonus weapon at the start of a 2nd Run – and read this note on the table.

File #27: ID Card Security Protocols

Once Tyrell opens the gate on the west office waiting area in the R.P.D., you can find this note next to a strongbox on the bench.

File #28: Sept. 20 Arrest Report

Check Marvin's desk in the R.P.D.'s west office.

File #29: Internal Memo

Grab this off the table in the R.P.D. darkroom.

File #30: Note to a Friend

Read the yellow legal pad on the bench in the middle of the R.P.D. locker room.

File #31: 3F Locker

Look at the photo on the whiteboard just inside the secure deposit room in the R.P.D.

File #32: Report on the Mansion Incident

When Tyrell tells you to take a look around in the STARS office, go into Wesker's office and take this off his desk.

File #33: U.B.C.S. New Weaponry Notice

As Jill, check the bench in the Dilapidated Storage safe room, next to the mine rounds.

File #34: Clock Tower Brochure

When you reach the Clock Tower Plaza, check the two park benches facing the water for some handgun bullets and this file.

File #35: Spencer Memorial Pamphlet

This is surprisingly easy to miss. It's on the spinner rack in the hospital's reception area, next to the locked door on its east wall.

File #36: Nurse's Journal: Sept. 25

Check the desk in the lab reception room in the hospital.

File #37: Nurse's Journal: Sept. 27

Search the shelves on the east wall in the records room on the second floor of the hospital.

File #38: Nurse's Journal: Sept. 29

Look on the desk in the center of the staff room on the second floor of the hospital.

File #39: Memos from Administration

This note is taped to the wall next to the door to the locker room in the hospital's staff room.

File #40: Note about a Tape Recording

Check the desk in the nurses' station on the second floor of the hospital.

File #41: Re: Lost Items

Use the hospital I.D. card to open the door to the operating room on the hospital's first floor. This file is on a cart in the center of the room, although it's a little tricky to spot.

File #42: Banquet Invitation

Read the blood-spattered note next to Bard in his private lab in the hospital.

File #43: Email from Nathaniel Bard

This is one of two unmissable files in the game. You get this automatically off the computer in Bard's private lab in the hospital.

File #44: Elevator Notice

At the base of the freight elevator in the underground storage facility, you'll find a safe room that's labeled "Office" on your map. This note is found next to the typewriter there.

File #45: Employee Memo

While you're hunting for fuses in the warehouse, you'll have to cut through a small storage room south of the office. This file is found on a stack of boxes on the west side of that room.

File #46: Unfinished Activity Log

This is the second of two unmissable files. Once you reach the warehouse control room, inspect the lit screen on its control console.

File #47: NEST 2 Employee Regulations

When you enter the NEST 2, go south along its entrance corridor to find a storage room. This file is on a desk inside it, and picking it up also grants you the area's map.

File #48: Isaac Graves' Diary

At the southern end of the second floor of the NEST 2, there's a short detour to the west that dead-ends in a blocked corridor. A zombie will reanimate as you approach. Take it out, and look on the floor underneath its body.

File #49: Essay on Vaccine Synthesis

Look on one of the padded tables next to the vaccine synthesizer in the NEST 2.

File #50: Shipping Notice

Use the override key on the first floor of the NEST 2 to reach a room that's being used to store corpses. This file can be found on a rolling table at the base of the stairs.

File #51: Weaponry Authorization Request

When you obtain the antigen sample on the second floor of the NEST 2, look on the desk next to the manipulator.

File #52: Expression of Concern

On the second floor of the NEST 2, in the lab where you find the second half of the vaccine base, read the note on the desk. (This is the point at which Jill finally learns the Nemesis' name.)

File #53: Scientist's Dying Message

On the balcony that overlooks the door to the Machinery Room in the NEST 2, check the dead guy slumped in the corner.

File #54: Disposal Center

After you grab the vaccine and escape from Nemesis, you end up in a safe room with a heavy-duty door on it. This file is taped to the wall next to that door.

File #55: Weapon Spec Sheet

Read the book on the shelf in the corner of the staff break room.

File #56: Suspicious Contract Memo

After your final fight with Nemesis, climb the ladder to the balcony and look on the floor to the left of the exit door. You're better off looking for the prompt, rather than the file itself, as it's exactly the same color as the walkway.

---

When you find and read all 56 Resident Evil 3 files, you unlock the Bookworm trophy/achievement. This is also one of the game's Records, which rewards you with 1,000 points to spend in the in-game Shop, as well as the Lab Equipment concept art and the model for the Drain Deimos. Be sure to head over to our Resident Evil 3 guides hub for more. 

]]>
Final Fantasy 7 Remake: How to Get Each Bridal Candidate Outfit https://www.gameskinny.com/6ngiz/final-fantasy-7-remake-how-to-get-each-bridal-candidate-outfit https://www.gameskinny.com/6ngiz/final-fantasy-7-remake-how-to-get-each-bridal-candidate-outfit Sat, 11 Apr 2020 13:35:50 -0400 Joshua Broadwell

Final Fantasy 7 Remake's Cloud dress event in Midgar's Wall Market makes a glorious return from the original, along with various options for Tifa's dresses and Aerith's dresses during the Don Corneo event. Like the original Final Fantasy 7, though, the process governing who ends up wearing what is pretty inscrutable unless you know the rules.

Tifa's is about a choice you make in Chapter 3, while the Cloud and Aerith dress choice depends on how you conduct yourself in Chapter 8. The Don Corneo event itself takes place during Chapter 9.

If you're aiming to get the Dressed to the Nines trophy, you'll need to acquire all nine dresses — three each for Cloud, Tifa, and Aerith. If you don't want to play through the game three times for each, you'll obviously need separate save files.

Final Fantasy 7 Remake: Tifa's Dresses

Determining what Tifa wears is the most straightforward and comes down to one specific conversation choice you make. First, you'll need to complete all six of Chapter 3's sidequests — including Lost Friends. That unlocks an event back at Tifa's and Cloud's apartment complex, which should be marked on your map.

Final Fantasy 7 Remake: What Would Suit Tifa Answers

If you're wondering how to answer Tifa's question in Chapter 3, here's how it goes.

During the conversation at the apartments, Tifa asks you a question, and you get three options. Each one is tied to a specific dress:

  • Mature — the blue dress shown in trailers
  • Sporty — long, leopard-print dress w/ hair in bun (pictured above)
  • Exotic —  black kung-fu-style robe

Final Fantasy 7 Remake: Aerith's Dresses

Picking Aerith's dress is a bit more involved, but still fairly simple. This process revolves around sidequests in Chapter 8.

Here's how it works.

  • Complete 0-2 sidequests in Chapter 8 — basic pink dress (shown in the article's header image)
  • Complete 3-5 sidequests in Chapter 8 — longer pink dress (shown above)
  • Complete all sidequests in Chapter 8 — fancy red dress shown in trailers.

Some have noted Madam M gives you a clue as to what dress Aerith will wear based on how well she says Cloud helped the people of Sector 5, but I actually didn't talk to her to verify this.

Final Fantasy 7 Remake: Cloud's Dresses

And now we come to Cloud's dresses. Figuring these out is the most complicated, just like in the original. Cloud's dress gets determined by how you complete certain quests in Chapter 9. After you fight the Hell House in Corneo's Coliseum, you can pursue one of two quest branches.

The first involves Chocobo Sam, and the second revolves around Madam M. The third — Cloud's basic black dress from the trailer — just requires you to do neither set of quests.

It's not completely clear if you have to complete the squats mission "Burning Thighs" first, but some have reported it's necessary. Do it anyway, just in case.

Chocobo Sam's Quests: Unlocking The Party Never Stops

Here's how to get Chocobo Sam's quests "The Party Never Stops" and "A Dynamite Body." First, speak with Johnny during the first portions of the chapter to trigger the Vagabond Johnny event, and choose "Yeah" when prompted.

Gamble with Sam when he asks you to.

Final Fantasy 7 Remake heads or tails?

It doesn't matter which choices you make here. Sam wins if you call heads or tails. Don't say "no deal" if you want to continue on this route, though.

Madam M's Parlor

Choose the "Poor Man's Course" massage option at Madam M's parlor.

Aerith's Dress Question

Tell Aerith you think her dress is "alright."

Doing all this gets you Cloud's black dress with the blue bodice and bow.

Madam M's Quests

Madam M's quests "The Price of Thievery" and "Shear's Counterattack" require basically the opposite. You'll say "No" to Johnny if you speak to him early in the chapter. Or you could probably just ignore him too, but we spoke to him and said "No."

Chocobo Sam's Gamble

Choose not to gamble with Chocobo Sam ("No deal" is the option for that. Aerith does it instead, and he still wins).

Madam M's Parlor

Purchase the "Luxury Massage" service for 3,000 Gil at Madam M's parlor.

Aerith's Dress Question

Choose "It matters what I think?" when Aerith asks about her dress.

All this gets you the purple and white dress Cloud's wearing in the image at the top of this piece.

---

And that's that. Again, you won't be getting all nine dresses or the Dressed to the Nines trophy in one playthrough. If you don't really care about the trophy, though, you can just choose whatever dress you want each character to have and move right along. There's no major significance here.

Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more Final Fantasy 7 Remake guides and our review in the coming days.

]]>